* emacs-lisp-intro.texi: Use @quotation for license notice.
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @include emacsver.texi
12
13 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
14
15 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
16 @c Set the following @-commands appropriately.
17
18 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
19 @c @smallbook
20 @c @clear largebook
21
22 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
23 @c @c smallbook
24 @c @set largebook
25
26 @c European A4 size paper:
27 @c @c smallbook
28 @c @afourpaper
29 @c @set largebook
30
31 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
32 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
33
34 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
35 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
36 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
37
38 @set smallbook
39 @ifset smallbook
40 @smallbook
41 @clear largebook
42 @end ifset
43
44 @c ================ Included Figures ================
45
46 @c If you clear this, the figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams
47 @c rather than PostScript/PDF.
48 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
49 @set print-postscript-figures
50 @c clear print-postscript-figures
51
52 @comment %**end of header
53
54 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
55 @c save on paper cost.
56 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
57 @tex
58 @ifset smallbook
59 @fonttextsize 10
60
61 @end ifset
62 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
63 @end tex
64
65 @c These refer to the printed book sold by the FSF.
66 @set edition-number 3.10
67 @set update-date 28 October 2009
68
69 @c For next or subsequent edition:
70 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
71 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
72 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
73
74 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
75 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
76 @ifset largebook
77 @tex
78 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
79 @end tex
80 @end ifset
81
82 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
83 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
84
85 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
86 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
87
88 @tex
89 \if \xrefprintnodename
90 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
91 \else
92 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
93 \fi
94 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
95 @end tex
96
97 @c ----------------------------------------------------
98
99 @dircategory Emacs lisp
100 @direntry
101 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr). A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
102 @end direntry
103
104 @copying
105 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
106 people who are not programmers.
107 @sp 1
108 @iftex
109 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
110 @end iftex
111 @ifnottex
112 Distributed with Emacs version @value{EMACSVER}.
113 @end ifnottex
114 @sp 1
115 Copyright @copyright{} 1990--1995, 1997, 2001--2013 Free Software
116 Foundation, Inc.
117 @sp 1
118
119 @iftex
120 Published by the:@*
121
122 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/}@*
123 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
124 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
125 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
126 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
127 @end iftex
128
129 @ifnottex
130 Printed copies available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by:
131
132 @example
133 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/
134 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
135 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
136 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
137 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
138 @end example
139 @end ifnottex
140
141 @sp 1
142 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
143
144 @quotation
145 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
146 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
147 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
148 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
149 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
150 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
151 Documentation License''.
152
153 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
154 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
155 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
156 @end quotation
157 @end copying
158
159 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
160 @tex
161 {\begingroup%
162 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
163 \endgroup}%
164 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
165 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
166 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
167 @end tex
168
169 @titlepage
170 @sp 6
171 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
172 @sp 2
173 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
174 @sp 2
175 @center Revised Third Edition
176 @sp 4
177 @center by Robert J. Chassell
178
179 @page
180 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
181 @insertcopying
182 @end titlepage
183
184 @iftex
185 @headings off
186 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
187 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
188 @end iftex
189
190 @ifnothtml
191 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
192 @ifset largebook
193 @tex
194 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
195 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
196 @end tex
197 @end ifset
198 @end ifnothtml
199
200 @shortcontents
201 @contents
202
203 @ifnottex
204 @node Top
205 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
206
207 @ifset WWW_GNU_ORG
208 @html
209 <p>The homepage for GNU Emacs is at
210 <a href="/software/emacs/">http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/</a>.<br>
211 To view this manual in other formats, click
212 <a href="/software/emacs/manual/eintr.html">here</a>.
213 @end html
214 @end ifset
215
216 @insertcopying
217
218 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
219 every node in every chapter.
220 @end ifnottex
221
222 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
223
224 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
225 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
226 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
227
228 @c iftex
229 @c global@pageno = -11
230 @c end iftex
231
232 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
233 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
234
235 @menu
236 * Preface:: What to look for.
237 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
238 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
239 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
240 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
241 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
242 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
243 a region.
244 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
245 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
246 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
247 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
248 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
249 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
250 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
251 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
252 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
253 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
254 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
255 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
256 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
257 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
258 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
259 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
260 * GNU Free Documentation License::
261 * Index::
262 * About the Author::
263
264 @detailmenu
265 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
266
267 Preface
268
269 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
270 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
271 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
272 * Lisp History::
273 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
274 * Thank You::
275
276 List Processing
277
278 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
279 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
280 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
281 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
282 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
283 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
284 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
285 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
286 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
287 * Summary:: The major points.
288 * Error Message Exercises::
289
290 Lisp Lists
291
292 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
293 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
294 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
295 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
296
297 The Lisp Interpreter
298
299 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
300 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
301
302 Evaluation
303
304 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
305 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
306
307 Variables
308
309 * fill-column Example::
310 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
311 without a function.
312 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
313
314 Arguments
315
316 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
317 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
318 of a variable or list.
319 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
320 variable number of arguments.
321 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
322 to a function.
323 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
324
325 Setting the Value of a Variable
326
327 * Using set:: Setting values.
328 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
329 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
330
331 Practicing Evaluation
332
333 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
334 causes evaluation.
335 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
336 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
337 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
338 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
339 the buffer.
340 * Evaluation Exercise::
341
342 How To Write Function Definitions
343
344 * Primitive Functions::
345 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
346 * Install:: Install a function definition.
347 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
348 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
349 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
350 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
351 * if:: What if?
352 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
353 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
354 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
355 * Review::
356 * defun Exercises::
357
358 Install a Function Definition
359
360 * Effect of installation::
361 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
362
363 Make a Function Interactive
364
365 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
366 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
367
368 @code{let}
369
370 * Prevent confusion::
371 * Parts of let Expression::
372 * Sample let Expression::
373 * Uninitialized let Variables::
374
375 The @code{if} Special Form
376
377 * if in more detail::
378 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
379
380 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
381
382 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
383
384 @code{save-excursion}
385
386 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
387 * Template for save-excursion::
388
389 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
390
391 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
392 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
393 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
394 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
395 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
396 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
397 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
398 * Buffer Exercises::
399
400 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
401
402 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
403 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
404
405 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
406
407 * append-to-buffer overview::
408 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
409 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
410 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
411
412 A Few More Complex Functions
413
414 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
415 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
416 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
417 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
418 * Second Buffer Related Review::
419 * optional Exercise::
420
421 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
422
423 * insert-buffer code::
424 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
425 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
426 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
427 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
428 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
429 * New insert-buffer::
430
431 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
432
433 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
434 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
435
436 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
437
438 * Optional Arguments::
439 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
440 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
441
442 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
443
444 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
445 * Large buffer case::
446 * Small buffer case::
447
448 Narrowing and Widening
449
450 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
451 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
452 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
453 * narrow Exercise::
454
455 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
456
457 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
458 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
459 * cons:: Constructing a list.
460 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
461 * nth::
462 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
463 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
464 * cons Exercise::
465
466 @code{cons}
467
468 * Build a list::
469 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
470
471 Cutting and Storing Text
472
473 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
474 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
475 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
476 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
477 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
478 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
479 * cons & search-fwd Review::
480 * search Exercises::
481
482 @code{zap-to-char}
483
484 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
485 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
486 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
487 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
488 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
489 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
490
491 @code{kill-region}
492
493 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
494 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
495 * Lisp macro::
496
497 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
498
499 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
500 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
501
502 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
503
504 * last-command & this-command::
505 * kill-append function::
506 * kill-new function::
507
508 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
509
510 * See variable current value::
511 * defvar and asterisk::
512
513 How Lists are Implemented
514
515 * Lists diagrammed::
516 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
517 * List Exercise::
518
519 Yanking Text Back
520
521 * Kill Ring Overview::
522 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
523 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
524
525 Loops and Recursion
526
527 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
528 * dolist dotimes::
529 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
530 * Looping exercise::
531
532 @code{while}
533
534 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
535 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
536 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
537 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
538 * Incrementing Loop Details::
539 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
540
541 Details of an Incrementing Loop
542
543 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
544 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
545 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
546
547 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
548
549 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
550 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
551 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
552
553 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
554
555 * dolist::
556 * dotimes::
557
558 Recursion
559
560 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
561 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
562 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
563 * Recursive triangle function::
564 * Recursion with cond::
565 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
566 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
567 * No deferment solution::
568
569 Recursion in Place of a Counter
570
571 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
572 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
573
574 Recursive Patterns
575
576 * Every::
577 * Accumulate::
578 * Keep::
579
580 Regular Expression Searches
581
582 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
583 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
584 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
585 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
586 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
587 * Regexp Review::
588 * re-search Exercises::
589
590 @code{forward-sentence}
591
592 * Complete forward-sentence::
593 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
594 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
595
596 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
597
598 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
599 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
600 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
601
602 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
603
604 * Why Count Words::
605 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
606 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
607 * Counting Exercise::
608
609 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
610
611 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
612 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
613
614 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
615
616 * Divide and Conquer::
617 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
618 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
619 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
620 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
621 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
622 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
623 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
624 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
625 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
626
627 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
628
629 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
630 * append:: Attach one list to another.
631
632 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
633
634 * Data for Display in Detail::
635 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
636 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
637 * Counting function definitions::
638
639 Readying a Graph
640
641 * Columns of a graph::
642 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
643 * recursive-graph-body-print::
644 * Printed Axes::
645 * Line Graph Exercise::
646
647 Your @file{.emacs} File
648
649 * Default Configuration::
650 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
651 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
652 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
653 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
654 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
655 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
656 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
657 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
658 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
659 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
660 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
661 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
662 * Miscellaneous::
663 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
664
665 Debugging
666
667 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
668 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
669 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
670 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
671 * Debugging Exercises::
672
673 Handling the Kill Ring
674
675 * What the Kill Ring Does::
676 * current-kill::
677 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
678 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
679 * ring file::
680
681 The @code{current-kill} Function
682
683 * Code for current-kill::
684 * Understanding current-kill::
685
686 @code{current-kill} in Outline
687
688 * Body of current-kill::
689 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
690 * Determining the Element::
691
692 A Graph with Labeled Axes
693
694 * Labeled Example::
695 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
696 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
697 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
698 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
699
700 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
701
702 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
703 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
704 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
705 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
706 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
707 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
708
709 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
710
711 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
712 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
713
714 Printing the Whole Graph
715
716 * The final version:: A few changes.
717 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
718 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
719 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
720 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
721 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
722 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
723
724 @end detailmenu
725 @end menu
726
727 @node Preface
728 @unnumbered Preface
729
730 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
731 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
732 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
733 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
734 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
735 extension to the editor.
736
737 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
738 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
739 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
740 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
741 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
742 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
743 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
744 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
745
746 @menu
747 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
748 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
749 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
750 * Lisp History::
751 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
752 * Thank You::
753 @end menu
754
755 @ifnottex
756 @node Why
757 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
758 @end ifnottex
759
760 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
761 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
762 you would any other programming language.
763
764 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
765 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
766 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
767 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
768 can teach yourself to go further.
769
770 @node On Reading this Text
771 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
772
773 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
774 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
775 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
776 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
777 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
778 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
779 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
780 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
781 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
782 there.
783
784 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
785 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
786 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
787 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
788 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
789 implemented.
790 Also, I
791 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
792 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
793 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
794
795 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
796 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
797 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
798 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
799 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
800 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
801 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
802 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
803 around your home town.
804
805 @ignore
806 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
807 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
808 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
809 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
810 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
811 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
812 @end ignore
813
814 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
815 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
816 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
817 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
818 advantage.
819
820 @node Who You Are
821 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
822
823 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
824 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
825 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
826 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
827
828 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
829
830 @quotation
831 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
832 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
833
834 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
835 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
836 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
837 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
838 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
839 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
840 @end quotation
841
842 This introduction is not written for this person!
843
844 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
845 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
846 different context, or to review it.
847
848 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
849 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
850 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
851 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
852 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
853 information is formally introduced.)
854
855 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
856 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
857 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
858 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
859 what is important, and concentrate on it.
860
861 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
862 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
863 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
864 as a daunting mountain.
865
866 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
867 document,
868 @iftex
869 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
870 @end iftex
871 @ifnottex
872 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
873 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
874 @end ifnottex
875 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
876 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
877 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
878 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
879 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
880 when you are writing your own programs.
881
882 @node Lisp History
883 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
884 @cindex Lisp history
885
886 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
887 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
888 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
889 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
890
891 @cindex Maclisp
892 @cindex Common Lisp
893 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
894 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
895 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
896 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
897 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
898
899 @node Note for Novices
900 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
901
902 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
903 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
904 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
905 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
906 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
907 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
908
909 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
910 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
911 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
912 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
913 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
914 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
915 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
916 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
917 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
918 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
919 @key{ALT}.)
920 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
921 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
922 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
923 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
924 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
925 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
926 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
927 press the @key{\} key.
928
929 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
930 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
931 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
932 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
933 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
934 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
935 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
936 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
937
938 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
939 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
940 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
941
942 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
943 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
944 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
945
946 @node Thank You
947 @unnumberedsec Thank You
948
949 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
950 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
951 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.
952 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
953 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
954 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
955
956 @flushright
957 Robert J. Chassell
958 @ifnothtml
959 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
960 @end ifnothtml
961 @ifhtml
962 bob@@gnu.org
963 @end ifhtml
964 @end flushright
965
966 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
967
968 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
969
970 @tex
971 \par\vfill\supereject
972 \headings off
973 \ifodd\pageno
974 \par\vfill\supereject
975 \else
976 \par\vfill\supereject
977 \page\hbox{}\page
978 \par\vfill\supereject
979 \fi
980 @end tex
981
982 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
983 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
984 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
985 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
986 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
987 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
988 @c E.g., note that the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
989 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
990 @iftex
991 @headings off
992 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
993 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
994 @global@pageno = 1
995 @end iftex
996
997 @node List Processing
998 @chapter List Processing
999
1000 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1001 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1002 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1003 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1004 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1005 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1006 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1007 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1008 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1009 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1010 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1011
1012 @menu
1013 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1014 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1015 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1016 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1017 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1018 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1019 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1020 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1021 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1022 * Summary:: The major points.
1023 * Error Message Exercises::
1024 @end menu
1025
1026 @node Lisp Lists
1027 @section Lisp Lists
1028 @cindex Lisp Lists
1029
1030 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1031 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1032 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1033 to be familiar with:
1034
1035 @smallexample
1036 @group
1037 '(rose
1038 violet
1039 daisy
1040 buttercup)
1041 @end group
1042 @end smallexample
1043
1044 @noindent
1045 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1046 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1047 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1048 @cindex Flowers in a field
1049
1050 @menu
1051 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1052 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1053 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1054 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1055 @end menu
1056
1057 @ifnottex
1058 @node Numbers Lists
1059 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1060 @end ifnottex
1061
1062 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1063 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1064 separated by whitespace.
1065
1066 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1067 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1068 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1069 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1070 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1071 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1072 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1073
1074 @need 1200
1075 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1076
1077 @smallexample
1078 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1079 @end smallexample
1080
1081 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1082 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1083 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1084 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1085
1086 @node Lisp Atoms
1087 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1088 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1089
1090 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1091 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1092 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1093 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1094 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1095 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1096 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1097 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1098
1099 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1100 right next to a parenthesis.
1101
1102 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1103 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1104 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1105 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1106 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1107 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1108 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1109
1110 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1111 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1112 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1113 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1114 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1115 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1116 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1117 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1118 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1119 as a synonym for expression.)
1120
1121 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1122 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1123 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1124 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1125 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1126 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1127 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1128 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1129 unsplittable.
1130
1131 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1132 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1133 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1134 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1135
1136 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1137 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1138 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1139 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1140 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1141 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1142 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1143 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1144 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1145 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1146 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1147
1148 @need 1250
1149 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1150 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1151 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1152
1153 @smallexample
1154 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1155 @end smallexample
1156
1157 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1158 @noindent
1159 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1160 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1161 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1162 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1163 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1164 used differently.
1165
1166 @node Whitespace in Lists
1167 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1168 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1169
1170 @need 1200
1171 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1172 of the Lisp language,
1173
1174 @smallexample
1175 @group
1176 '(this list
1177 looks like this)
1178 @end group
1179 @end smallexample
1180
1181 @need 800
1182 @noindent
1183 is exactly the same as this:
1184
1185 @smallexample
1186 '(this list looks like this)
1187 @end smallexample
1188
1189 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1190 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1191 @samp{this} in that order.
1192
1193 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1194 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1195 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1196 order to tell them apart.)
1197
1198 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1199 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1200 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1201 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1202 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1203 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1204 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1205
1206 @node Typing Lists
1207 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1208 @cindex Help typing lists
1209 @cindex Formatting help
1210
1211 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1212 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1213 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1214 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1215 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1216 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1217 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1218 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1219 the enclosing list.
1220
1221 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1222 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1223 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1224 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1225 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1226 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1227
1228 @node Run a Program
1229 @section Run a Program
1230 @cindex Run a program
1231 @cindex Program, running one
1232
1233 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1234 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1235 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1236 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1237 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1238 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1239 three things that you really want!)
1240
1241 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1242 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1243 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1244 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1245 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1246 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1247 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1248 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1249 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1250 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1251
1252 @need 1250
1253 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1254 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1255 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1256
1257 @smallexample
1258 (+ 2 2)
1259 @end smallexample
1260
1261 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1262 @noindent
1263 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1264 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1265 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1266 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1267 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1268
1269 @smallexample
1270 '(this is a quoted list)
1271 @end smallexample
1272
1273 @noindent
1274 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1275
1276 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1277 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1278 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1279 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1280 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1281 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1282 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1283
1284 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1285 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1286 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1287 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1288 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1289
1290 @node Making Errors
1291 @section Generate an Error Message
1292 @cindex Generate an error message
1293 @cindex Error message generation
1294
1295 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1296 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1297 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1298 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1299 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1300 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1301 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1302 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1303
1304 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1305 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1306
1307 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1308 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1309 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1310 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1311 C-e}:
1312
1313 @smallexample
1314 (this is an unquoted list)
1315 @end smallexample
1316
1317 @ignore
1318 @noindent
1319 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1320 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1321 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1322 earlier, version 20 result.
1323
1324 @need 1250
1325 @noindent
1326 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1327 you will see the following in it:
1328 @end ignore
1329
1330 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1331 following in it:
1332
1333 @smallexample
1334 @group
1335 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1336 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1337 (this is an unquoted list)
1338 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1339 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1340 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1341 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1342 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1343 @end group
1344 @end smallexample
1345
1346 @need 1200
1347 @noindent
1348 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1349 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1350 debugger window go away, type:
1351
1352 @smallexample
1353 q
1354 @end smallexample
1355
1356 @noindent
1357 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1358 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1359 it.
1360
1361 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1362 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1363
1364 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1365 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1366 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1367 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1368 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1369 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1370
1371 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1372 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1373 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1374 backwards.
1375
1376 @need 800
1377 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1378
1379 @smallexample
1380 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1381 @end smallexample
1382
1383 @noindent
1384 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1385 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1386 @samp{void-function this}.
1387
1388 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1389
1390 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1391 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1392 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1393 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1394 computer to do something.
1395
1396 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1397 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1398 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1399
1400 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1401 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1402 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1403 contain the instructions is `void'.
1404
1405 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1406 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1407 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1408 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1409
1410 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1411 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1412 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1413 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1414 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1415 the echo area and look like this:
1416
1417 @smallexample
1418 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1419 @end smallexample
1420
1421 @noindent
1422 @ignore
1423 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1424 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1425 @end ignore
1426 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1427 move the cursor.
1428
1429 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1430 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1431 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1432 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1433 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1434 moment.)
1435
1436 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1437 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1438 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1439
1440 @node Names & Definitions
1441 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1442 @cindex Symbol names
1443
1444 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1445 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1446 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1447 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1448 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1449 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1450 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1451 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1452 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1453 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1454
1455 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1456 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1457 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1458 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1459 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1460
1461 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1462 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1463 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1464 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1465 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1466 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1467
1468 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1469 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1470 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1471 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1472 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1473
1474 @node Lisp Interpreter
1475 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1476 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1477 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1478
1479 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1480 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1481 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1482 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1483 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1484 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1485 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1486 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1487
1488 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1489 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1490 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1491 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1492 yourself or the computer.
1493
1494 @menu
1495 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1496 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1497 @end menu
1498
1499 @ifnottex
1500 @node Complications
1501 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1502 @end ifnottex
1503
1504 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1505 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1506 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1507 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1508 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1509
1510 @cindex Special form
1511 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and
1512 do not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called
1513 @dfn{special forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a
1514 function, and there are not many of them. In the next few chapters,
1515 you will be introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1516
1517 As well as special forms, there are also @dfn{macros}. A macro
1518 is a construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it
1519 translates a Lisp expression into another expression that is to be
1520 evaluated in place of the original expression. (@xref{Lisp macro}.)
1521
1522 For the purposes of this introduction, you do not need to worry too much
1523 about whether something is a special form, macro, or ordinary function.
1524 For example, @code{if} is a special form (@pxref{if}), but @code{when}
1525 is a macro (@pxref{Lisp macro}). In earlier versions of Emacs,
1526 @code{defun} was a special form, but now it is a macro (@pxref{defun}).
1527 It still behaves in the same way.
1528
1529 The final complication is this: if the function that the
1530 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1531 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1532 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1533 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1534 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1535 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1536 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1537 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1538 used by the enclosing expression.
1539
1540 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1541 the next.
1542
1543 @node Byte Compiling
1544 @subsection Byte Compiling
1545 @cindex Byte compiling
1546
1547 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1548 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1549 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1550 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1551 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1552
1553 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1554 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1555 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1556 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1557 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1558 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1559
1560 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1561 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1562 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1563 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1564 compilation.
1565
1566 @node Evaluation
1567 @section Evaluation
1568 @cindex Evaluation
1569
1570 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1571 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1572 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1573 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1574 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1575 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1576
1577 @menu
1578 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1579 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1580 @end menu
1581
1582 @ifnottex
1583 @node How the Interpreter Acts
1584 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1585 @end ifnottex
1586
1587 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1588 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1589 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1590 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1591 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1592 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1593 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1594 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1595 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1596
1597 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1598 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1599 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1600 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1601 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1602 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1603 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1604
1605 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1606 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1607 or else produce an error.
1608
1609 @node Evaluating Inner Lists
1610 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1611 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1612 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1613
1614 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1615 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1616 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1617 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1618 expressions.
1619
1620 @need 1250
1621 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1622 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1623
1624 @smallexample
1625 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1626 @end smallexample
1627
1628 @noindent
1629 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1630
1631 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1632 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1633 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1634 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1635 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1636
1637 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1638 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1639 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1640 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1641 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1642
1643 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1644 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1645 expression, or inside the expression.
1646
1647 @need 800
1648 Here is another copy of the expression:
1649
1650 @smallexample
1651 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1652 @end smallexample
1653
1654 @noindent
1655 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1656 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1657 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1658 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1659 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1660 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1661 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1662
1663 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1664 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1665 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1666 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1667 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1668 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1669 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1670 see in the next section.
1671
1672 @node Variables
1673 @section Variables
1674 @cindex Variables
1675
1676 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1677 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1678 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1679 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1680 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1681 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1682 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1683 @dfn{variable}.
1684
1685 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1686 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1687 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1688 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1689 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1690 ``great programming center''.
1691
1692 @ignore
1693 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1694 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1695 string; these are discussed later.)
1696 @end ignore
1697
1698 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1699 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1700 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1701 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1702 function definition, and vice-verse.
1703
1704 @menu
1705 * fill-column Example::
1706 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1707 without a function.
1708 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1709 @end menu
1710
1711 @ifnottex
1712 @node fill-column Example
1713 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1714 @end ifnottex
1715
1716 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1717 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1718 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1719 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1720 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1721 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1722 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1723 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1724 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1725
1726 @smallexample
1727 fill-column
1728 @end smallexample
1729
1730 @noindent
1731 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1732 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1733 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1734 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1735 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1736 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1737 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1738 the value is known.
1739
1740 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1741 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1742 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1743 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1744
1745 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1746 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1747 this.
1748
1749 @node Void Function
1750 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1751 @cindex Symbol without function error
1752 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1753
1754 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1755 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1756 not intend to use it as a function name.
1757
1758 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1759 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1760 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1761 Try evaluating this:
1762
1763 @smallexample
1764 (fill-column)
1765 @end smallexample
1766
1767 @need 1250
1768 @noindent
1769 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1770
1771 @smallexample
1772 @group
1773 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1774 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1775 (fill-column)
1776 eval((fill-column))
1777 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1778 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1779 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1780 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1781 @end group
1782 @end smallexample
1783
1784 @noindent
1785 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1786 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1787
1788 @ignore
1789 @need 800
1790 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1791
1792 @smallexample
1793 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1794 @end smallexample
1795
1796 @noindent
1797 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1798 another key.)
1799 @end ignore
1800
1801 @node Void Variable
1802 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1803 @cindex Symbol without value error
1804 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1805
1806 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1807 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1808 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1809 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1810 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1811
1812 @smallexample
1813 (+ 2 2)
1814 @end smallexample
1815
1816 @need 1500
1817 @noindent
1818 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1819 says:
1820
1821 @smallexample
1822 @group
1823 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1824 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1825 eval(+)
1826 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1827 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1828 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1829 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1830 @end group
1831 @end smallexample
1832
1833 @noindent
1834 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1835 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1836
1837 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1838 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1839 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1840 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1841 have a definition.
1842
1843 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1844 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1845 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1846 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1847 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1848 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1849 @code{+} by itself.
1850
1851 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1852 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1853 variable was void.
1854
1855 @ignore
1856 @need 800
1857 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1858
1859 @example
1860 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1861 @end example
1862
1863 @noindent
1864 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1865 @end ignore
1866
1867 @node Arguments
1868 @section Arguments
1869 @cindex Arguments
1870 @cindex Passing information to functions
1871
1872 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1873 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1874 as follows:
1875
1876 @smallexample
1877 (+ 2 2)
1878 @end smallexample
1879
1880 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1881 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1882 the @code{+}.
1883
1884 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1885 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1886 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1887 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1888
1889 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1890 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1891 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1892 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1893 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1894 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1895 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1896 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1897 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1898 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1899 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1900 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1901 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1902 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1903 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1904 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1905 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1906 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1907 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1908
1909 @menu
1910 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1911 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
1912 of a variable or list.
1913 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
1914 variable number of arguments.
1915 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
1916 to a function.
1917 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
1918 @end menu
1919
1920 @node Data types
1921 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
1922 @cindex Data types
1923 @cindex Types of data
1924 @cindex Arguments' data types
1925
1926 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
1927 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
1928 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
1929 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
1930
1931 @need 1250
1932 @findex concat
1933 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
1934 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
1935 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
1936 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
1937 following:
1938
1939 @smallexample
1940 (concat "abc" "def")
1941 @end smallexample
1942
1943 @noindent
1944 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
1945
1946 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
1947 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
1948 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
1949 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
1950 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
1951 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
1952 punctuation) from the beginning of the string.
1953
1954 @need 800
1955 For example, if you evaluate the following:
1956
1957 @smallexample
1958 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
1959 @end smallexample
1960
1961 @noindent
1962 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
1963 string and the two numbers.
1964
1965 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
1966 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
1967 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
1968 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
1969 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
1970 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
1971 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
1972 atom such as a number or symbol.
1973
1974 @node Args as Variable or List
1975 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
1976
1977 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
1978 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
1979 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
1980
1981 @need 1250
1982 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
1983 C-e}:
1984
1985 @smallexample
1986 (+ 2 fill-column)
1987 @end smallexample
1988
1989 @noindent
1990 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
1991 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
1992 @code{fill-column} is 72.
1993
1994 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
1995 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
1996 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
1997 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
1998 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
1999 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2000
2001 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2002 @smallexample
2003 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2004 @end smallexample
2005
2006 @noindent
2007 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2008 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2009 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2010 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2011 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2012 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2013 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2014
2015 @node Variable Number of Arguments
2016 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2017 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2018 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2019
2020 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2021 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2022 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2023 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2024 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2025
2026 @need 1250
2027 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2028
2029 @smallexample
2030 @group
2031 (+) @result{} 0
2032
2033 (*) @result{} 1
2034 @end group
2035 @end smallexample
2036
2037 @need 1250
2038 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2039
2040 @smallexample
2041 @group
2042 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2043
2044 (* 3) @result{} 3
2045 @end group
2046 @end smallexample
2047
2048 @need 1250
2049 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2050
2051 @smallexample
2052 @group
2053 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2054
2055 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2056 @end group
2057 @end smallexample
2058
2059 @node Wrong Type of Argument
2060 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2061 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2062 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2063
2064 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2065 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2066 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2067 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2068 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2069 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2070
2071 @smallexample
2072 (+ 2 'hello)
2073 @end smallexample
2074
2075 @noindent
2076 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2077 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2078 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2079 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2080 could not carry out its addition.
2081
2082 @need 1250
2083 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2084
2085 @noindent
2086 @smallexample
2087 @group
2088 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2089 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2090 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2091 +(2 hello)
2092 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2093 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2094 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2095 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2096 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2097 @end group
2098 @end smallexample
2099
2100 @need 1250
2101 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2102 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2103 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2104
2105 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2106 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2107 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2108 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2109
2110 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2111 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2112 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2113 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2114 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2115 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2116 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2117 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2118 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2119 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2120 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2121 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2122
2123 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2124 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2125 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2126 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2127 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2128 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2129 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2130 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2131 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2132 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2133
2134 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2135 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2136 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2137 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2138 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2139
2140 @ignore
2141 @need 1250
2142 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2143 message that says:
2144
2145 @smallexample
2146 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2147 @end smallexample
2148
2149 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2150 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2151 @end ignore
2152
2153 @node message
2154 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2155 @findex message
2156
2157 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2158 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2159 that we will describe it here.
2160
2161 @need 1250
2162 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2163 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2164
2165 @smallexample
2166 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2167 @end smallexample
2168
2169 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2170 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2171 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2172 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2173 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2174 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2175 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2176 detail}, for an example of this.)
2177
2178 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2179 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2180 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2181 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2182 @samp{%s} is.
2183
2184 @need 1250
2185 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2186 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2187
2188 @smallexample
2189 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2190 @end smallexample
2191
2192 @noindent
2193 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2194 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2195 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2196 of @code{%s}.
2197
2198 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2199 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2200 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2201
2202 @smallexample
2203 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2204 @end smallexample
2205
2206 @noindent
2207 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2208 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2209 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2210 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2211 anything that is not a number.}.
2212
2213 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2214 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2215 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2216 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2217
2218 @need 1250
2219 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2220
2221 @smallexample
2222 @group
2223 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2224 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2225 @end group
2226 @end smallexample
2227
2228 @noindent
2229 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2230 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2231
2232 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2233 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2234 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2235 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2236 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2237
2238 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2239 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2240 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2241 for @samp{%s}:
2242
2243 @smallexample
2244 @group
2245 (message "He saw %d %s"
2246 (- fill-column 32)
2247 (concat "red "
2248 (substring
2249 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2250 " leaping."))
2251 @end group
2252 @end smallexample
2253
2254 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2255 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2256 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2257 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2258 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2259 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2260
2261 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2262 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2263 area.
2264
2265 @node set & setq
2266 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2267 @cindex Variable, setting value
2268 @cindex Setting value of variable
2269
2270 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2271 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2272 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2273 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2274 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2275
2276 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2277 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2278
2279 @menu
2280 * Using set:: Setting values.
2281 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2282 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2283 @end menu
2284
2285 @node Using set
2286 @subsection Using @code{set}
2287 @findex set
2288
2289 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2290 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2291 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2292
2293 @smallexample
2294 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @noindent
2298 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2299 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2300 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2301 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2302 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2303 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2304 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2305 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2306 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2307
2308 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2309 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2310 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2311
2312 @smallexample
2313 flowers
2314 @end smallexample
2315
2316 @noindent
2317 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2318 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2319
2320 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2321 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2322 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2323
2324 @smallexample
2325 'flowers
2326 @end smallexample
2327
2328 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2329 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2330 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2331 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2332 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2333 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2334 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2335 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2336 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2337 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2338 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2339 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2340
2341 @node Using setq
2342 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2343 @findex setq
2344
2345 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2346 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2347 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2348 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2349 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2350 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2351 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2352
2353 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2354 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2355 is used:
2356
2357 @smallexample
2358 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2359 @end smallexample
2360
2361 @noindent
2362 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2363 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2364 means @code{quote}.)
2365
2366 @need 1250
2367 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2368
2369 @smallexample
2370 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2371 @end smallexample
2372
2373 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2374 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2375 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2376 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2377 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2378 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2379
2380 @smallexample
2381 @group
2382 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2383 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2384 @end group
2385 @end smallexample
2386
2387 @noindent
2388 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2389 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2390 formatted lists.)
2391
2392 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2393 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2394 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2395 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2396 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2397 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2398 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2399 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2400
2401 @node Counting
2402 @subsection Counting
2403 @cindex Counting
2404
2405 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2406 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2407 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2408 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2409 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2410 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2411 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2412 evaluated.
2413
2414 @smallexample
2415 @group
2416 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2417
2418 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2419
2420 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2421 @end group
2422 @end smallexample
2423
2424 @noindent
2425 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2426 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2427
2428 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2429 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2430 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2431 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2432 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2433 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2434 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2435 the counter will be incremented.
2436
2437 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2438 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2439 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2440 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2441 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2442 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2443 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2444 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2445 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2446
2447 @node Summary
2448 @section Summary
2449
2450 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2451 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2452 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2453
2454 @need 1000
2455 In summary,
2456
2457 @itemize @bullet
2458
2459 @item
2460 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2461
2462 @item
2463 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2464 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2465
2466 @item
2467 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2468 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2469 quotation marks, or numbers.
2470
2471 @item
2472 A number evaluates to itself.
2473
2474 @item
2475 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2476
2477 @item
2478 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2479
2480 @item
2481 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2482 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2483 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2484
2485 @item
2486 A single quotation mark,
2487 @ifinfo
2488 '
2489 @end ifinfo
2490 @ifnotinfo
2491 @code{'}
2492 @end ifnotinfo
2493 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2494 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2495 would if the quote were not there.
2496
2497 @item
2498 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2499 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2500 of which the function is the first element.
2501
2502 @item
2503 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2504 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2505 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2506 create a side effect.
2507 @end itemize
2508
2509 @node Error Message Exercises
2510 @section Exercises
2511
2512 A few simple exercises:
2513
2514 @itemize @bullet
2515 @item
2516 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2517 not within parentheses.
2518
2519 @item
2520 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2521 between parentheses.
2522
2523 @item
2524 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2525
2526 @item
2527 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2528 evaluated.
2529 @end itemize
2530
2531 @node Practicing Evaluation
2532 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2533 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2534 @cindex Evaluation practice
2535
2536 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2537 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2538 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2539 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2540 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2541 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2542 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2543 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2544
2545 @menu
2546 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2547 causes evaluation.
2548 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2549 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2550 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2551 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2552 the buffer.
2553 * Evaluation Exercise::
2554 @end menu
2555
2556 @ifnottex
2557 @node How to Evaluate
2558 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2559 @end ifnottex
2560
2561 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2562 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2563 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2564 how Emacs works.}
2565
2566 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2567 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2568 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2569 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2570 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2571 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2572 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2573 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2574 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2575 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2576
2577 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2578 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2579 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2580 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2581 will be described as we come to them.
2582
2583 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2584 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2585 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2586 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2587
2588 @node Buffer Names
2589 @section Buffer Names
2590 @findex buffer-name
2591 @findex buffer-file-name
2592
2593 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2594 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2595 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2596 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2597 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2598 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2599 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2600 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2601
2602 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2603 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2604 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2605 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2606 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2607 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2608 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2609 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2610 and is thus saved permanently.
2611
2612 @need 1250
2613 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2614 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2615 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2616
2617 @example
2618 @group
2619 (buffer-name)
2620
2621 (buffer-file-name)
2622 @end group
2623 @end example
2624
2625 @noindent
2626 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2627 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2628 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2629
2630 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2631 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2632 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2633 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2634 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2635
2636 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2637 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2638 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2639 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2640 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2641 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2642 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2643 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2644
2645 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2646 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2647 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2648
2649 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2650 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2651 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2652 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2653
2654 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2655 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2656 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2657 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2658 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2659 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2660 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2661
2662 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2663 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2664 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2665 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2666 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2667 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2668 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2669 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2670 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2671 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2672 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2673 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2674 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2675 and cultural center in its own right.
2676
2677 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2678 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2679 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2680
2681 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2682 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2683 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2684 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2685 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2686 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2687
2688 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2689 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2690 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2691 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2692 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2693 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2694 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2695 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2696
2697 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2698 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2699 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2700 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2701 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2702
2703 @smallexample
2704 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2705 @end smallexample
2706
2707 @noindent
2708 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2709 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2710 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2711 this book), this feature is very useful.
2712
2713 @node Getting Buffers
2714 @section Getting Buffers
2715 @findex current-buffer
2716 @findex other-buffer
2717 @cindex Getting a buffer
2718
2719 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2720 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2721 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2722 you get is the buffer itself.
2723
2724 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2725 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2726 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2727 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2728 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2729 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2730 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2731 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2732 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2733 @code{current-buffer}.
2734
2735 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2736 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2737 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2738 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2739 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2740 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2741 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2742
2743 @need 800
2744 Here is an expression containing the function:
2745
2746 @smallexample
2747 (current-buffer)
2748 @end smallexample
2749
2750 @noindent
2751 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2752 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2753 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2754 just its name.
2755
2756 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2757 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2758 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2759
2760 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2761 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2762 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2763 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2764 will return that buffer.
2765
2766 @need 800
2767 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2768
2769 @smallexample
2770 (other-buffer)
2771 @end smallexample
2772
2773 @noindent
2774 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2775 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2776 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2777 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2778 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2779 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2780
2781 @node Switching Buffers
2782 @section Switching Buffers
2783 @findex switch-to-buffer
2784 @findex set-buffer
2785 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2786
2787 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2788 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2789 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2790 different buffer.
2791
2792 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2793 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2794 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2795 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2796 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2797 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2798 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2799 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2800 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2801 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2802 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2803 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2804 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2805 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2806 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2807
2808 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2809 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2810 does:
2811
2812 @smallexample
2813 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2814 @end smallexample
2815
2816 @noindent
2817 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2818 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2819 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2820 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2821 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2822 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2823 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2824 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2825 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2826 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2827 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2828 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2829 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2830 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2831 following more complex expression:
2832
2833 @smallexample
2834 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2835 @end smallexample
2836
2837 @c noindent
2838 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2839 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2840 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2841 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2842 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2843 to go to another visible buffer.}
2844
2845 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2846 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2847 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2848 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2849 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2850 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2851 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2852 not need to be visible on the screen.
2853
2854 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2855 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2856 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2857 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2858 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2859 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2860 there until the command finishes running).
2861
2862 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2863 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2864 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2865 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2866 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2867 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2868 or her.
2869
2870 @node Buffer Size & Locations
2871 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2872 @cindex Size of buffer
2873 @cindex Buffer size
2874 @cindex Point location
2875 @cindex Location of point
2876
2877 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2878 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2879 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2880 the location of point within it.
2881
2882 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2883 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2884 characters in the buffer.
2885
2886 @smallexample
2887 (buffer-size)
2888 @end smallexample
2889
2890 @noindent
2891 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
2892 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2893
2894 @cindex @samp{point} defined
2895 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
2896 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
2897 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
2898 beginning of the buffer up to point.
2899
2900 @need 1250
2901 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
2902 the following expression in the usual way:
2903
2904 @smallexample
2905 (point)
2906 @end smallexample
2907
2908 @noindent
2909 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
2910 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
2911 book.
2912
2913 @need 1250
2914 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
2915 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
2916
2917 @smallexample
2918 (point)
2919 @end smallexample
2920
2921 @noindent
2922 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
2923 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
2924 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
2925 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
2926
2927 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
2928 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
2929 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
2930 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
2931 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
2932 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
2933 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
2934 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
2935 value of point in the current buffer.
2936
2937 @node Evaluation Exercise
2938 @section Exercise
2939
2940 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
2941 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
2942
2943 @node Writing Defuns
2944 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
2945 @cindex Definition writing
2946 @cindex Function definition writing
2947 @cindex Writing a function definition
2948
2949 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
2950 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
2951 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
2952 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
2953 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
2954 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
2955 symbol refers to it.)
2956
2957 @menu
2958 * Primitive Functions::
2959 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
2960 * Install:: Install a function definition.
2961 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
2962 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
2963 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
2964 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
2965 * if:: What if?
2966 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
2967 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
2968 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
2969 * Review::
2970 * defun Exercises::
2971 @end menu
2972
2973 @ifnottex
2974 @node Primitive Functions
2975 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
2976 @end ifnottex
2977 @cindex Primitive functions
2978 @cindex Functions, primitive
2979
2980 @cindex C language primitives
2981 @cindex Primitives written in C
2982 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
2983 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
2984 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
2985 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
2986 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
2987 by you) and some will be primitives written in C@. The primitive
2988 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
2989 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
2990 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
2991
2992 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
2993 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
2994 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
2995 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
2996 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
2997 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
2998
2999 @node defun
3000 @section The @code{defun} Macro
3001 @findex defun
3002
3003 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3004 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3005 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3006 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3007 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3008 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}).
3009
3010 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3011 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3012 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3013 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3014 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3015 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3016 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3017 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3018
3019 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3020 @code{defun}:
3021
3022 @enumerate
3023 @item
3024 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3025 attached.
3026
3027 @item
3028 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3029 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3030 @code{()}.
3031
3032 @item
3033 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3034 strongly recommended.)
3035
3036 @item
3037 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3038 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3039 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3040
3041 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3042 @item
3043 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3044 function definition.
3045 @end enumerate
3046
3047 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3048 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3049
3050 @smallexample
3051 @group
3052 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3053 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3054 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3055 @var{body}@dots{})
3056 @end group
3057 @end smallexample
3058
3059 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3060 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3061 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3062
3063 @smallexample
3064 @group
3065 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3066 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3067 (* 7 number))
3068 @end group
3069 @end smallexample
3070
3071 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3072 followed by the name of the function.
3073
3074 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3075 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3076 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3077 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3078 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3079 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3080 function.
3081
3082 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3083 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3084 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3085 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3086 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3087 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3088 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3089 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3090 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3091 the function clear.
3092
3093 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3094 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3095 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3096 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3097 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3098 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3099 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3100 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3101 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3102 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3103 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3104 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3105
3106 @ignore
3107 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3108 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3109 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3110 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3111 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3112 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3113 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3114 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3115 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3116 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3117 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3118 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3119 @end ignore
3120
3121 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3122 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3123 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3124 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3125 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3126 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3127 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3128 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3129 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3130 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3131 write.
3132
3133 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3134 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3135 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3136 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3137 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3138 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3139 function for addition.)
3140
3141 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3142 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3143 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3144 to evaluate this yet!
3145
3146 @smallexample
3147 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3148 @end smallexample
3149
3150 @noindent
3151 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3152 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3153 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3154 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3155 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3156 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3157 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3158 definition begins.
3159
3160 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3161 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3162 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3163 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3164 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3165 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3166 section.
3167
3168 @node Install
3169 @section Install a Function Definition
3170 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3171 @cindex Definition installation
3172 @cindex Function definition installation
3173
3174 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3175 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3176 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3177 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3178 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3179 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3180 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3181 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3182 action installs the function definition.
3183
3184 @smallexample
3185 @group
3186 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3187 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3188 (* 7 number))
3189 @end group
3190 @end smallexample
3191
3192 @noindent
3193 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3194 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3195 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3196 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3197 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3198 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3199
3200 @menu
3201 * Effect of installation::
3202 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3203 @end menu
3204
3205 @ifnottex
3206 @node Effect of installation
3207 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3208 @end ifnottex
3209
3210 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3211 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3212 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3213 echo area.
3214
3215 @smallexample
3216 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3217 @end smallexample
3218
3219 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3220 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3221 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3222 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3223
3224 @smallexample
3225 @group
3226 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3227 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3228
3229 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3230 @end group
3231 @end smallexample
3232
3233 @noindent
3234 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3235
3236 @node Change a defun
3237 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3238 @cindex Changing a function definition
3239 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3240 @cindex Definition, how to change
3241
3242 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3243 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3244 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3245 very simple.
3246
3247 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3248 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3249 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3250 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3251 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3252 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3253 version''.
3254
3255 @smallexample
3256 @group
3257 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3258 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3259 (+ number number number number number number number))
3260 @end group
3261 @end smallexample
3262
3263 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3264 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3265 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3266 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3267 each line with a semicolon.
3268
3269 @xref{Beginning init File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3270 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3271 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3272
3273 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3274 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3275 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3276
3277 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3278 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3279 install it again.
3280
3281 @node Interactive
3282 @section Make a Function Interactive
3283 @cindex Interactive functions
3284 @findex interactive
3285
3286 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3287 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3288 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3289 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3290 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3291 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3292
3293 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3294 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3295 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3296 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3297 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3298 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3299
3300 @menu
3301 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3302 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3303 @end menu
3304
3305 @ifnottex
3306 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven
3307 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3308 @end ifnottex
3309
3310 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3311 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3312 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3313
3314 @need 1250
3315 Here is the code:
3316
3317 @smallexample
3318 @group
3319 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3320 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3321 (interactive "p")
3322 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3323 @end group
3324 @end smallexample
3325
3326 @noindent
3327 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3328 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3329 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3330 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3331 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3332 echo area.
3333
3334 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3335 ways:
3336
3337 @enumerate
3338 @item
3339 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3340 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3341 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3342
3343 @item
3344 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3345 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3346 @end enumerate
3347
3348 @noindent
3349 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3350 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3351 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3352
3353 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3354 to a key.)
3355
3356 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3357 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3358 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3359 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3360
3361 @node multiply-by-seven in detail
3362 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3363
3364 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3365 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3366 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3367 looks like this:
3368
3369 @smallexample
3370 @group
3371 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3372 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3373 (interactive "p")
3374 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3375 @end group
3376 @end smallexample
3377
3378 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3379 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3380 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3381
3382 @need 1000
3383 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3384 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3385
3386 @smallexample
3387 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3388 @end smallexample
3389
3390 @need 1250
3391 @noindent
3392 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3393 evaluate the line as if it were:
3394
3395 @smallexample
3396 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3397 @end smallexample
3398
3399 @noindent
3400 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3401 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3402 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3403 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3404 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3405
3406 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3407 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3408 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3409 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3410 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3411 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3412 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3413 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3414 sequence is located.
3415
3416 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3417 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3418 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3419 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3420 is 35}.
3421
3422 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3423 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3424 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3425 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3426 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3427 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3428 quotes.)
3429
3430 @node Interactive Options
3431 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3432 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3433 @cindex Interactive options
3434
3435 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3436 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3437 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3438 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3439 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3440 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3441 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3442 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3443 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3444
3445 @need 1250
3446 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3447 is
3448
3449 @smallexample
3450 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3451 @end smallexample
3452
3453 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3454 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3455 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3456 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3457 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3458 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3459 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3460 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3461 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3462 character, but no more.
3463
3464 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3465
3466 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3467 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3468 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3469 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3470 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3471 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3472 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3473 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3474 is one) and the character.
3475
3476 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3477 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3478 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3479
3480 @smallexample
3481 @group
3482 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3483 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3484 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3485 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3486 @end group
3487 @end smallexample
3488
3489 @noindent
3490 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3491 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3492 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3493
3494 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3495 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3496 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3497 this.
3498
3499 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3500 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3501 a list.
3502
3503 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3504 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3505 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3506 explanation about this technique.
3507
3508 @node Permanent Installation
3509 @section Install Code Permanently
3510 @cindex Install code permanently
3511 @cindex Permanent code installation
3512 @cindex Code installation
3513
3514 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3515 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3516 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3517 function definition again.
3518
3519 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3520 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3521 doing this:
3522
3523 @itemize @bullet
3524 @item
3525 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3526 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3527 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3528 the function definitions within it are installed.
3529 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3530
3531 @item
3532 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3533 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3534 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3535 functions in the files.
3536 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3537
3538 @item
3539 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3540 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3541 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3542 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3543 distribution.)
3544 @end itemize
3545
3546 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3547 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3548 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3549 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3550 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3551 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3552 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3553 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3554 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3555
3556 @node let
3557 @section @code{let}
3558 @findex let
3559
3560 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3561 to use in most function definitions.
3562
3563 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3564 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3565 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3566
3567 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3568 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3569 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3570 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3571 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3572 different house.
3573
3574 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3575 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3576 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3577 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3578 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3579 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3580
3581 @menu
3582 * Prevent confusion::
3583 * Parts of let Expression::
3584 * Sample let Expression::
3585 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3586 @end menu
3587
3588 @ifnottex
3589 @node Prevent confusion
3590 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3591 @end ifnottex
3592
3593 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3594 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3595 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3596 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3597 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3598 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3599 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3600 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
3601
3602 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3603 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3604 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3605 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3606
3607 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3608 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3609 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3610 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3611 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3612 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3613 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3614
3615 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3616 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3617 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3618 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3619 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3620 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3621 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3622 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3623 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3624 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3625 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3626
3627 @node Parts of let Expression
3628 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3629 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3630 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3631
3632 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3633 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3634 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3635 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3636 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3637 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3638 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3639
3640 @need 800
3641 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3642
3643 @smallexample
3644 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3645 @end smallexample
3646
3647 @noindent
3648 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3649 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3650 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3651 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3652 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3653
3654 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3655 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3656 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3657 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3658
3659 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3660 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3661 template.
3662
3663 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3664 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3665
3666 @smallexample
3667 @group
3668 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3669 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3670 @dots{})
3671 @var{body}@dots{})
3672 @end group
3673 @end smallexample
3674
3675 @node Sample let Expression
3676 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3677 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3678 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3679
3680 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3681 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3682 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3683
3684 @smallexample
3685 @group
3686 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3687 (tiger 'fierce))
3688 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3689 zebra tiger))
3690 @end group
3691 @end smallexample
3692
3693 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3694
3695 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3696 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3697 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3698 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3699 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3700 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3701 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3702 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3703 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3704 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3705 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3706 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3707 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3708 in the echo area.
3709
3710 @need 1500
3711 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3712 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3713 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3714
3715 @smallexample
3716 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3717 @end smallexample
3718
3719 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3720 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3721 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3722 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3723 second @samp{%s}.
3724
3725 @node Uninitialized let Variables
3726 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3727 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3728 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3729
3730 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3731 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3732 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3733
3734 @smallexample
3735 @group
3736 (let ((birch 3)
3737 pine
3738 fir
3739 (oak 'some))
3740 (message
3741 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3742 birch pine fir oak))
3743 @end group
3744 @end smallexample
3745
3746 @noindent
3747 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3748
3749 @need 1250
3750 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3751 appear in your echo area:
3752
3753 @smallexample
3754 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3755 @end smallexample
3756
3757 @noindent
3758 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3759 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3760 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3761
3762 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3763 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3764 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3765 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3766 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3767 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3768 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3769 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3770 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3771 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3772
3773 @node if
3774 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3775 @findex if
3776 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3777
3778 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3779 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3780 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3781 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3782 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3783 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3784
3785 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3786 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3787 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3788 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3789
3790 @menu
3791 * if in more detail::
3792 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3793 @end menu
3794
3795 @ifnottex
3796 @node if in more detail
3797 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3798 @end ifnottex
3799
3800 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3801 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3802 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3803 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3804 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3805 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3806 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3807
3808 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3809 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3810 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3811 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3812 expression easier to read.
3813
3814 @smallexample
3815 @group
3816 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3817 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3818 @end group
3819 @end smallexample
3820
3821 @noindent
3822 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3823 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3824
3825 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3826 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3827 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3828
3829 @smallexample
3830 @group
3831 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3832 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3833 @end group
3834 @end smallexample
3835
3836 @noindent
3837 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3838 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3839 @findex > (greater than)
3840
3841 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3842 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3843 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3844 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3845 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3846
3847 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3848 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3849 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3850 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3851 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3852
3853 @smallexample
3854 @group
3855 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3856 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3857 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3858 then warn of a tiger."
3859 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3860 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3861 @end group
3862 @end smallexample
3863
3864 @need 1500
3865 @noindent
3866 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3867 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3868 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3869
3870 @smallexample
3871 @group
3872 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3873
3874 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
3875
3876 @end group
3877 @end smallexample
3878
3879 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
3880 @noindent
3881 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
3882 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
3883 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
3884 printed in the echo area.
3885
3886 @node type-of-animal in detail
3887 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
3888
3889 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
3890
3891 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
3892 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
3893 a second for an @code{if} expression.
3894
3895 @need 1250
3896 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
3897
3898 @smallexample
3899 @group
3900 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
3901 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3902 @var{body}@dots{})
3903 @end group
3904 @end smallexample
3905
3906 @need 800
3907 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
3908
3909 @smallexample
3910 @group
3911 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3912 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3913 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3914 then warn of a tiger."
3915 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
3916 @end group
3917 @end smallexample
3918
3919 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
3920 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
3921 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
3922 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
3923 every function definition. The body of the function definition
3924 consists of the @code{if} expression.
3925
3926 @need 800
3927 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
3928
3929 @smallexample
3930 @group
3931 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3932 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
3933 @end group
3934 @end smallexample
3935
3936 @need 1250
3937 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
3938 looks like this:
3939
3940 @smallexample
3941 @group
3942 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3943 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3944 @end group
3945 @end smallexample
3946
3947 @need 800
3948 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
3949
3950 @smallexample
3951 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3952 @end smallexample
3953
3954 @noindent
3955 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
3956 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
3957 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
3958 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
3959 this function.
3960
3961 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
3962 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
3963 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
3964 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
3965 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
3966 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
3967
3968 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
3969 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
3970 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
3971 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
3972
3973 @node else
3974 @section If--then--else Expressions
3975 @cindex Else
3976
3977 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
3978 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
3979 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
3980 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
3981 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
3982 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
3983 the beach, else read a book!''.
3984
3985 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
3986 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
3987 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
3988 indented less than the then-part:
3989
3990 @smallexample
3991 @group
3992 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3993 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
3994 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
3995 @end group
3996 @end smallexample
3997
3998 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
3999 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4000
4001 @smallexample
4002 @group
4003 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4004 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4005 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4006 @end group
4007 @end smallexample
4008
4009 @noindent
4010 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4011 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4012 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4013 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4014
4015 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4016 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4017 expression.
4018
4019 @need 1500
4020 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4021 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4022 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4023 arguments to the function.
4024
4025 @smallexample
4026 @group
4027 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4028 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4029 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4030 then warn of a tiger;
4031 else say it's not fierce."
4032 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4033 (message "It's a tiger!")
4034 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4035 @end group
4036 @end smallexample
4037 @sp 1
4038
4039 @smallexample
4040 @group
4041 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4042
4043 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4044
4045 @end group
4046 @end smallexample
4047
4048 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4049 @noindent
4050 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4051 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4052 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4053 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4054
4055 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4056 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4057 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4058 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4059 and write your program accordingly.)
4060
4061 @node Truth & Falsehood
4062 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4063 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4064 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4065 @findex nil
4066
4067 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4068 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4069 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4070 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4071 at all---is `true'.
4072
4073 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4074 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4075 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4076 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4077 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4078 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4079
4080 @menu
4081 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4082 @end menu
4083
4084 @ifnottex
4085 @node nil explained
4086 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4087 @end ifnottex
4088
4089 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4090
4091 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4092 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4093 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4094 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4095 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4096 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4097
4098 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4099 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4100 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4101 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4102 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4103 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4104 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4105 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4106
4107 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4108
4109 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4110 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4111 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4112 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4113 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4114 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4115
4116 @smallexample
4117 @group
4118 (if 4
4119 'true
4120 'false)
4121 @end group
4122
4123 @group
4124 (if nil
4125 'true
4126 'false)
4127 @end group
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 @need 1250
4131 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4132 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4133 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4134 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4135
4136 @smallexample
4137 (> 5 4)
4138 @end smallexample
4139
4140 @need 1250
4141 @noindent
4142 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4143
4144 @smallexample
4145 (> 4 5)
4146 @end smallexample
4147
4148 @node save-excursion
4149 @section @code{save-excursion}
4150 @findex save-excursion
4151 @cindex Region, what it is
4152 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4153 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4154 @findex point
4155 @findex mark
4156
4157 The @code{save-excursion} function is the third and final special form
4158 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4159
4160 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4161 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4162 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4163 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4164 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4165 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4166
4167 @menu
4168 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4169 * Template for save-excursion::
4170 @end menu
4171
4172 @ifnottex
4173 @node Point and mark
4174 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4175 @end ifnottex
4176
4177 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4178 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4179 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4180 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4181 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4182 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4183 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4184 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4185 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4186
4187 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4188 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4189 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4190 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4191 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4192 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4193 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4194 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4195 times.
4196
4197 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4198 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4199 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4200 @code{print-region}.
4201
4202 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4203 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4204 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4205 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4206 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4207 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4208 evaluated.
4209
4210 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4211 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4212 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4213 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4214 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4215 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4216 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4217
4218 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4219 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4220 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4221 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4222
4223 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4224 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4225 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4226 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4227 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4228 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4229
4230 @node Template for save-excursion
4231 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4232
4233 @need 800
4234 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4235
4236 @smallexample
4237 @group
4238 (save-excursion
4239 @var{body}@dots{})
4240 @end group
4241 @end smallexample
4242
4243 @noindent
4244 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4245 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4246 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4247 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4248 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4249 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4250 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4251
4252 @need 1250
4253 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4254 looks like this:
4255
4256 @smallexample
4257 @group
4258 (save-excursion
4259 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4260 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4261 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4262 @dots{}
4263 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4264 @end group
4265 @end smallexample
4266
4267 @noindent
4268 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4269
4270 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4271 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4272
4273 @smallexample
4274 @group
4275 (let @var{varlist}
4276 (save-excursion
4277 @var{body}@dots{}))
4278 @end group
4279 @end smallexample
4280
4281 @node Review
4282 @section Review
4283
4284 In the last few chapters we have introduced a macro and a fair number
4285 of functions and special forms. Here they are described in brief,
4286 along with a few similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4287
4288 @table @code
4289 @item eval-last-sexp
4290 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4291 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4292 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4293 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4294
4295 @item defun
4296 Define function. This macro has up to five parts: the name, a
4297 template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4298 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of
4299 the definition.
4300
4301 @need 1250
4302 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4303 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4304 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4305
4306 @smallexample
4307 @group
4308 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4309 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4310 (interactive)
4311 (beginning-of-line 1)
4312 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4313 @end group
4314 @end smallexample
4315
4316 @ignore
4317 In GNU Emacs 22,
4318
4319 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4320 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4321 (interactive "p")
4322 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4323 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4324
4325 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4326 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4327 (interactive)
4328 (beginning-of-line 1)
4329 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4330 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4331 (backward-prefix-chars))
4332 @end ignore
4333
4334 @item interactive
4335 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4336 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4337 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4338 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4339 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4340 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4341
4342 @need 1000
4343 Common code characters are:
4344
4345 @table @code
4346 @item b
4347 The name of an existing buffer.
4348
4349 @item f
4350 The name of an existing file.
4351
4352 @item p
4353 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4354
4355 @item r
4356 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4357 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4358 rather than one.
4359 @end table
4360
4361 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4362 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4363 code characters.
4364
4365 @item let
4366 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4367 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4368 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4369 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4370 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4371 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4372 @code{let}.
4373
4374 @need 1250
4375 For example,
4376
4377 @smallexample
4378 @group
4379 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4380 (bar (buffer-size)))
4381 (message
4382 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4383 foo bar))
4384 @end group
4385 @end smallexample
4386
4387 @item save-excursion
4388 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4389 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4390 and mark and buffer afterward.
4391
4392 @need 1250
4393 For example,
4394
4395 @smallexample
4396 @group
4397 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4398 (- (point)
4399 (save-excursion
4400 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4401 @end group
4402 @end smallexample
4403
4404 @item if
4405 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4406 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4407
4408 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4409 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4410 commonly used.
4411
4412 @need 1250
4413 For example,
4414
4415 @smallexample
4416 @group
4417 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4418 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4419 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4420 @end group
4421 @end smallexample
4422
4423 @need 1250
4424 @item <
4425 @itemx >
4426 @itemx <=
4427 @itemx >=
4428 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4429 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4430 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4431 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4432 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4433 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4434 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4435
4436 @need 800
4437 @item =
4438 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4439 markers, are equal.
4440
4441 @need 1250
4442 @item equal
4443 @itemx eq
4444 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4445 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4446 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4447 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4448 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4449 @findex equal
4450 @findex eq
4451
4452 @need 1250
4453 @item string<
4454 @itemx string-lessp
4455 @itemx string=
4456 @itemx string-equal
4457 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4458 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4459 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4460
4461 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4462 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4463 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4464
4465 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4466 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4467 smaller than any string of characters.
4468
4469 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4470 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4471 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4472
4473 @item message
4474 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4475 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4476 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4477 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4478 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4479 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4480 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4481
4482 @item setq
4483 @itemx set
4484 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4485 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4486 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4487 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4488 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4489 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4490
4491 @item buffer-name
4492 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4493
4494 @item buffer-file-name
4495 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4496 visiting.
4497
4498 @item current-buffer
4499 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4500 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4501
4502 @item other-buffer
4503 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4504 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4505 buffer).
4506
4507 @item switch-to-buffer
4508 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4509 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4510
4511 @item set-buffer
4512 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4513 alter what the window is showing.
4514
4515 @item buffer-size
4516 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4517
4518 @item point
4519 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4520 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4521 buffer.
4522
4523 @item point-min
4524 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4525 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4526
4527 @item point-max
4528 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4529 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4530 effect.
4531 @end table
4532
4533 @need 1500
4534 @node defun Exercises
4535 @section Exercises
4536
4537 @itemize @bullet
4538 @item
4539 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4540 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4541
4542 @item
4543 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4544 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4545 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4546 @end itemize
4547
4548 @node Buffer Walk Through
4549 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4550
4551 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4552 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4553 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4554 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4555 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4556 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4557 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4558
4559 @menu
4560 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4561 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4562 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4563 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4564 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4565 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4566 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4567 * Buffer Exercises::
4568 @end menu
4569
4570 @node Finding More
4571 @section Finding More Information
4572
4573 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4574 @cindex Find function documentation
4575 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4576 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4577 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4578 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4579 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4580 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4581 then @key{RET}).
4582
4583 @cindex Find source of function
4584 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4585 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4586 function definition.
4587
4588 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4589 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4590 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4591 you directly to the function definition.
4592
4593 @ignore
4594 Not In version 22
4595
4596 If you move point over the file name and press
4597 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4598 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4599 definition.
4600 @end ignore
4601
4602 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4603 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4604 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4605 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4606 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4607 Texinfo source file of this document.
4608 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4609 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4610 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4611
4612 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4613 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4614 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4615 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4616 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4617 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4618 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4619 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4620 @key{ALT}.)
4621
4622 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4623 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4624 @findex find-tag
4625 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4626 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4627 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4628 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4629 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4630 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4631 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4632 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4633 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4634 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4635
4636 @need 1250
4637 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4638 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4639 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4640 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4641
4642 @smallexample
4643 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4644 @end smallexample
4645
4646 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4647
4648 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4649 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4650 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4651
4652 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4653 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4654 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4655 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4656 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4657 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4658 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4659 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4660 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4661 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4662 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4663 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4664 by topic keywords.''
4665
4666 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4667 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4668 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4669
4670 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4671 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4672 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4673 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4674 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4675
4676 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4677 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4678 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4679 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4680 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4681 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4682
4683 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4684 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4685 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4686 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4687 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4688 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4689 of the buffer.
4690
4691 @need 1250
4692 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4693
4694 @smallexample
4695 @group
4696 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4697 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4698 leave mark at previous position."
4699 (interactive)
4700 (push-mark)
4701 (goto-char (point-min)))
4702 @end group
4703 @end smallexample
4704
4705 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4706 the macro @code{defun}:
4707
4708 @enumerate
4709 @item
4710 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4711
4712 @item
4713 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4714
4715 @item
4716 The documentation string.
4717
4718 @item
4719 The interactive expression.
4720
4721 @item
4722 The body.
4723 @end enumerate
4724
4725 @noindent
4726 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4727 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4728 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4729 an optional argument.)
4730
4731 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4732 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4733 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4734 require one.
4735
4736 @need 800
4737 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4738
4739 @smallexample
4740 @group
4741 (push-mark)
4742 (goto-char (point-min))
4743 @end group
4744 @end smallexample
4745
4746 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4747 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4748 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4749 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4750
4751 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4752 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4753 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4754 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4755 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4756
4757 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4758 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4759 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4760 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4761
4762 That is all there is to the function definition!
4763
4764 @findex describe-function
4765 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4766 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4767 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4768 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4769 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4770 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4771 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4772
4773 @smallexample
4774 @group
4775 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4776 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4777 @end group
4778 @end smallexample
4779
4780 @noindent
4781 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4782
4783 @noindent
4784 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4785 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4786 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4787 @key{RET}}.)
4788
4789 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4790 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4791 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4792 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4793
4794 @node mark-whole-buffer
4795 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4796 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4797
4798 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4799 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4800 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4801
4802 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4803 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4804 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4805 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4806 h}.
4807
4808 @menu
4809 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4810 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4811 @end menu
4812
4813 @ifnottex
4814 @node mark-whole-buffer overview
4815 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4816 @end ifnottex
4817
4818 @need 1250
4819 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4820
4821 @smallexample
4822 @group
4823 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4824 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4825 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4826 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4827 that uses or sets the mark."
4828 (interactive)
4829 (push-mark (point))
4830 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4831 (goto-char (point-min)))
4832 @end group
4833 @end smallexample
4834
4835 @need 1250
4836 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4837 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4838 this:
4839
4840 @smallexample
4841 @group
4842 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4843 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4844 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4845 @var{body}@dots{})
4846 @end group
4847 @end smallexample
4848
4849 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4850 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4851 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4852 The documentation comes next.
4853
4854 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4855 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4856 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4857 previous section.
4858
4859 @need 1250
4860 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer
4861 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4862
4863 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4864 lines of code:
4865
4866 @c GNU Emacs 22
4867 @smallexample
4868 @group
4869 (push-mark (point))
4870 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4871 (goto-char (point-min))
4872 @end group
4873 @end smallexample
4874
4875 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
4876
4877 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
4878 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
4879 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
4880 at the current position of the cursor.
4881
4882 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
4883 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
4884 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
4885 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
4886 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
4887 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
4888 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
4889 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
4890 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
4891 there.
4892
4893 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
4894 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
4895 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
4896 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
4897 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
4898 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
4899 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
4900 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
4901 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
4902 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
4903 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
4904
4905 @need 1250
4906 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
4907 The line reads
4908
4909 @smallexample
4910 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4911 @end smallexample
4912
4913 @noindent
4914 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
4915 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
4916 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
4917 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
4918 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
4919 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
4920 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
4921 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
4922 region. It is often turned off.
4923
4924 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
4925 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
4926 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
4927 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
4928 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
4929 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
4930 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
4931 region.
4932
4933 @node append-to-buffer
4934 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
4935 @findex append-to-buffer
4936
4937 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
4938 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
4939 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
4940 current buffer to a specified buffer.
4941
4942 @menu
4943 * append-to-buffer overview::
4944 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
4945 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
4946 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
4947 @end menu
4948
4949 @ifnottex
4950 @node append-to-buffer overview
4951 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
4952 @end ifnottex
4953
4954 @findex insert-buffer-substring
4955 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
4956 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
4957 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
4958 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
4959 inserts them into another buffer.
4960
4961 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
4962 concerned with setting up the conditions for
4963 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
4964 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
4965 to, and the region that will be copied.
4966
4967 @need 1250
4968 Here is the complete text of the function:
4969
4970 @smallexample
4971 @group
4972 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
4973 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
4974 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
4975 @end group
4976
4977 @group
4978 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
4979 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
4980 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
4981 (interactive
4982 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
4983 (current-buffer) t))
4984 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
4985 @end group
4986 @group
4987 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
4988 (save-excursion
4989 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
4990 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
4991 point)
4992 (set-buffer append-to)
4993 (setq point (point))
4994 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
4995 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
4996 (dolist (window windows)
4997 (when (= (window-point window) point)
4998 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
4999 @end group
5000 @end smallexample
5001
5002 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5003 filled-in templates.
5004
5005 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5006 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5007
5008 @smallexample
5009 @group
5010 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5011 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5012 (interactive @dots{})
5013 @var{body}@dots{})
5014 @end group
5015 @end smallexample
5016
5017 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5018 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5019 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5020 will be copied.
5021
5022 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5023 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5024 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5025 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5026
5027 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5028 name. (The function can handle either.)
5029
5030 @node append interactive
5031 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5032
5033 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5034 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5035 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5036 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5037
5038 @smallexample
5039 @group
5040 (interactive
5041 (list (read-buffer
5042 "Append to buffer: "
5043 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5044 (region-beginning)
5045 (region-end)))
5046 @end group
5047 @end smallexample
5048
5049 @noindent
5050 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5051 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5052
5053 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5054 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5055 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5056 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5057 provide if you don't specify anything.
5058
5059 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5060 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5061 for true.
5062
5063 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5064 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5065 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5066 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5067 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5068
5069 @need 1250
5070 The expression looks like this:
5071
5072 @smallexample
5073 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5074 @end smallexample
5075
5076 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5077 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5078 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5079
5080 @need 1250
5081 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5082 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5083
5084 @smallexample
5085 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5086 @end smallexample
5087
5088 @noindent
5089 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5090 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5091
5092 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5093 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5094 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5095 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5096 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5097
5098 @node append-to-buffer body
5099 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5100
5101 @ignore
5102 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5103
5104 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5105 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5106 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5107
5108 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5109 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5110 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5111 (interactive
5112 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5113 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5114 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5115 (save-excursion
5116 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5117 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5118 point)
5119 (set-buffer append-to)
5120 (setq point (point))
5121 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5122 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5123 (dolist (window windows)
5124 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5125 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5126 @end ignore
5127
5128 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5129
5130 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5131 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5132 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5133 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5134 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5135
5136 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5137 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5138 @code{let} expression in outline:
5139
5140 @smallexample
5141 @group
5142 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5143 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5144 (interactive @dots{})
5145 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5146 @var{body}@dots{})
5147 @end group
5148 @end smallexample
5149
5150 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5151
5152 @enumerate
5153 @item
5154 The symbol @code{let};
5155
5156 @item
5157 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5158 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5159
5160 @item
5161 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5162 @end enumerate
5163
5164 @need 800
5165 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5166
5167 @smallexample
5168 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5169 @end smallexample
5170
5171 @noindent
5172 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5173 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5174 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5175 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5176 which you will copy.
5177
5178 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5179 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5180 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5181 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5182 The line looks like this:
5183
5184 @smallexample
5185 @group
5186 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5187 @dots{} )
5188 @end group
5189 @end smallexample
5190
5191 @noindent
5192 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5193 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5194 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5195 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5196
5197 @node append save-excursion
5198 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5199
5200 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5201 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5202
5203 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5204 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5205 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5206 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5207 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5208 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5209
5210 @need 1500
5211 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5212 @cindex Formatting convention
5213 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5214 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5215 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5216 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5217 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5218 this:
5219
5220 @smallexample
5221 @group
5222 (defun @dots{}
5223 @dots{}
5224 @dots{}
5225 (let@dots{}
5226 (save-excursion
5227 @dots{}
5228 @end group
5229 @end smallexample
5230
5231 @need 1500
5232 @noindent
5233 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5234 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5235 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5236 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5237 with the @code{let}:
5238
5239 @smallexample
5240 @group
5241 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5242 (save-excursion
5243 @dots{}
5244 (set-buffer @dots{})
5245 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5246 @dots{}))
5247 @end group
5248 @end smallexample
5249
5250 @need 1200
5251 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5252 of filling in the slots of a template:
5253
5254 @smallexample
5255 @group
5256 (save-excursion
5257 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5258 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5259 @dots{}
5260 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5261 @end group
5262 @end smallexample
5263
5264 @need 1200
5265 @noindent
5266 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5267 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5268 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5269 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5270 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5271
5272 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5273 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5274 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5275
5276 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5277 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5278 function.
5279
5280 @need 1250
5281 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5282
5283 @smallexample
5284 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5285 @end smallexample
5286
5287 @need 1250
5288 @noindent
5289 but now it is
5290
5291 @smallexample
5292 (set-buffer append-to)
5293 @end smallexample
5294
5295 @noindent
5296 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5297 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5298 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5299 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5300
5301 @ignore
5302 in GNU Emacs 22
5303
5304 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5305 (save-excursion
5306 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5307 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5308 point)
5309 (set-buffer append-to)
5310 (setq point (point))
5311 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5312 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5313 (dolist (window windows)
5314 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5315 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5316 @end ignore
5317
5318 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5319 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5320 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5321 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5322 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5323 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5324 @code{current-buffer}.
5325
5326 @need 1250
5327 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5328
5329 @smallexample
5330 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5331 @end smallexample
5332
5333 @noindent
5334 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5335 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5336 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5337 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5338 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5339 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5340 command.
5341
5342 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5343 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5344 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5345
5346 @need 800
5347 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5348
5349 @smallexample
5350 @group
5351 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5352 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5353 @var{change-buffer}
5354 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5355
5356 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5357 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5358 @end group
5359 @end smallexample
5360
5361 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5362 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5363 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5364 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5365 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5366 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5367
5368 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5369 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5370 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5371 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5372 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5373
5374 @node Buffer Related Review
5375 @section Review
5376
5377 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5378
5379 @table @code
5380 @item describe-function
5381 @itemx describe-variable
5382 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5383 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5384
5385 @item find-tag
5386 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5387 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5388 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5389 @key{META} key).
5390
5391 @item save-excursion
5392 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5393 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5394 the current buffer and return to it.
5395
5396 @item push-mark
5397 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5398 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5399 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5400
5401 @item goto-char
5402 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5403 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5404 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5405
5406 @item insert-buffer-substring
5407 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5408 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5409
5410 @item mark-whole-buffer
5411 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5412
5413 @item set-buffer
5414 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5415 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5416 to work on a different buffer.
5417
5418 @item get-buffer-create
5419 @itemx get-buffer
5420 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5421 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5422 buffer does not exist.
5423 @end table
5424
5425 @need 1500
5426 @node Buffer Exercises
5427 @section Exercises
5428
5429 @itemize @bullet
5430 @item
5431 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5432 then test it to see whether it works.
5433
5434 @item
5435 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5436 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5437
5438 @item
5439 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5440 function.
5441 @end itemize
5442
5443 @node More Complex
5444 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5445
5446 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5447 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5448 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5449 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5450 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5451 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5452 to which the name refers.
5453
5454 @menu
5455 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5456 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5457 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5458 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5459 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5460 * optional Exercise::
5461 @end menu
5462
5463 @node copy-to-buffer
5464 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5465 @findex copy-to-buffer
5466
5467 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5468 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5469 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5470 previous text in the second buffer.
5471
5472 @need 800
5473 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5474
5475 @smallexample
5476 @group
5477 @dots{}
5478 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5479 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5480 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5481 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5482 (erase-buffer)
5483 (save-excursion
5484 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5485 @end group
5486 @end smallexample
5487
5488 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5489 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5490
5491 @need 800
5492 The definition then says
5493
5494 @smallexample
5495 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5496 @end smallexample
5497
5498 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5499 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5500 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5501 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5502 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5503 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5504
5505 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5506 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5507 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5508 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5509 mechanism.)
5510
5511 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5512 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5513
5514 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5515 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5516
5517 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5518 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5519 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5520 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5521 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5522 @code{oldbuf}).
5523
5524 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5525 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5526
5527 @need 1250
5528 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5529
5530 @smallexample
5531 @group
5532 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5533 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5534 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5535 (erase-buffer)
5536 (save-excursion
5537 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5538 @end group
5539 @end smallexample
5540
5541 @node insert-buffer
5542 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5543 @findex insert-buffer
5544
5545 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5546 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5547 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5548 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5549
5550 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5551 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5552
5553 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5554 a discussion of the new body.)
5555
5556 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5557 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5558 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5559
5560 @menu
5561 * insert-buffer code::
5562 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5563 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5564 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5565 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5566 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5567 * New insert-buffer::
5568 @end menu
5569
5570 @ifnottex
5571 @node insert-buffer code
5572 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5573 @end ifnottex
5574
5575 @need 800
5576 Here is the earlier code:
5577
5578 @smallexample
5579 @group
5580 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5581 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5582 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5583 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5584 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5585 @end group
5586 @group
5587 (or (bufferp buffer)
5588 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5589 (let (start end newmark)
5590 (save-excursion
5591 (save-excursion
5592 (set-buffer buffer)
5593 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5594 @end group
5595 @group
5596 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5597 (setq newmark (point)))
5598 (push-mark newmark)))
5599 @end group
5600 @end smallexample
5601
5602 @need 1200
5603 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5604 outline of the function:
5605
5606 @smallexample
5607 @group
5608 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5609 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5610 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5611 @var{body}@dots{})
5612 @end group
5613 @end smallexample
5614
5615 @node insert-buffer interactive
5616 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5617 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5618
5619 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5620 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5621 buffer:@: }.
5622
5623 @menu
5624 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5625 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5626 @end menu
5627
5628 @node Read-only buffer
5629 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5630 @cindex Read-only buffer
5631 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5632 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5633
5634 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5635 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5636 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5637 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5638 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5639 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5640 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5641
5642 @node b for interactive
5643 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5644
5645 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5646 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5647 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5648 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5649 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5650 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5651 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5652 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5653 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5654 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5655 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5656
5657 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5658 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5659 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5660 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5661
5662 @node insert-buffer body
5663 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5664
5665 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5666 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5667 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5668 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5669 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5670 into the current buffer.
5671
5672 @need 1250
5673 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5674 function like this:
5675
5676 @smallexample
5677 @group
5678 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5679 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5680 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5681 (or @dots{}
5682 @dots{}
5683 @end group
5684 @group
5685 (let (@var{varlist})
5686 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5687 @end group
5688 @end smallexample
5689
5690 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5691 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5692 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5693
5694 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5695 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5696
5697 @node if & or
5698 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5699
5700 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5701 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5702 then the buffer itself must be got.
5703
5704 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5705 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5706 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5707 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5708
5709 @need 800
5710 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5711
5712 @smallexample
5713 @group
5714 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5715 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5716 @end group
5717 @end smallexample
5718
5719 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5720 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5721
5722 @need 1200
5723 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5724 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5725
5726 @smallexample
5727 @group
5728 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5729 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5730 @end group
5731 @end smallexample
5732
5733 @noindent
5734 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5735 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5736 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5737
5738 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5739 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5740 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5741 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5742 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5743 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5744 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5745 Argument}.)
5746
5747 @need 1200
5748 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5749 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5750
5751 @smallexample
5752 (not (bufferp buffer))
5753 @end smallexample
5754
5755 @noindent
5756 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5757 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5758 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5759 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5760
5761 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5762 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5763 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5764 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5765 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5766 a buffer.
5767
5768 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5769 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5770 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5771 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5772 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5773 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5774 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5775 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5776
5777 @node Insert or
5778 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5779
5780 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5781 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5782 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5783 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5784 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5785 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5786
5787 @findex or
5788 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5789 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5790 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5791 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5792 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5793
5794 @need 800
5795 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5796
5797 @smallexample
5798 @group
5799 (or (bufferp buffer)
5800 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5801 @end group
5802 @end smallexample
5803
5804 @noindent
5805 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5806 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5807 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5808 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5809 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5810 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5811 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5812
5813 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5814 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5815 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5816 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5817 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5818 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5819 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5820
5821 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5822 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5823 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5824 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5825 buffer.
5826
5827 @need 1250
5828 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5829 written like this:
5830
5831 @smallexample
5832 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5833 @end smallexample
5834
5835 @node Insert let
5836 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5837
5838 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5839 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5840 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5841 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5842 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5843 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5844 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5845
5846 @need 1200
5847 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5848 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5849 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5850
5851 @smallexample
5852 @group
5853 (save-excursion
5854 (set-buffer buffer)
5855 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5856 @end group
5857 @end smallexample
5858
5859 @noindent
5860 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
5861 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
5862 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
5863 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
5864 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
5865 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
5866 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
5867 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
5868 fourth.
5869
5870 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
5871 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
5872 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
5873 buffer from which the text will be copied.
5874
5875 @need 1250
5876 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
5877
5878 @smallexample
5879 @group
5880 (save-excursion
5881 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
5882 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
5883 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5884 (setq newmark (point)))
5885 @end group
5886 @end smallexample
5887
5888 @noindent
5889 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
5890 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
5891 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
5892 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
5893 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
5894 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
5895 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
5896
5897 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
5898 and mark are relocated to their original places.
5899
5900 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
5901 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
5902 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
5903 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
5904 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
5905 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
5906 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
5907 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
5908 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
5909 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
5910
5911 @need 1250
5912 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
5913
5914 @smallexample
5915 @group
5916 (let (start end newmark)
5917 (save-excursion
5918 (save-excursion
5919 (set-buffer buffer)
5920 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5921 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5922 (setq newmark (point)))
5923 (push-mark newmark))
5924 @end group
5925 @end smallexample
5926
5927 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
5928 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
5929 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
5930 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
5931 find and use again and again.
5932
5933 @node New insert-buffer
5934 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
5935 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
5936 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
5937
5938 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
5939
5940 @need 1250
5941 It consists of two expressions,
5942
5943 @smallexample
5944 @group
5945 (push-mark
5946 (save-excursion
5947 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
5948 (point)))
5949
5950 nil
5951 @end group
5952 @end smallexample
5953
5954 @noindent
5955 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
5956 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
5957
5958 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
5959 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
5960 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
5961 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
5962 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
5963 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
5964
5965 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
5966 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
5967 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
5968 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
5969 return any value.
5970
5971 @node beginning-of-buffer
5972 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
5973 @findex beginning-of-buffer
5974
5975 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
5976 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
5977 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
5978 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
5979
5980 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
5981 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
5982 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
5983 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
5984 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
5985 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
5986 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
5987 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
5988 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
5989 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
5990 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
5991 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
5992 moves to the end of the buffer.
5993
5994 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
5995 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
5996
5997 @menu
5998 * Optional Arguments::
5999 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6000 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6001 @end menu
6002
6003 @node Optional Arguments
6004 @subsection Optional Arguments
6005
6006 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6007 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6008 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6009 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6010
6011 @cindex Optional arguments
6012 @cindex Keyword
6013 @findex optional
6014 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6015 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6016 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6017 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6018 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6019 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6020
6021 @need 1200
6022 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6023 therefore looks like this:
6024
6025 @smallexample
6026 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6027 @end smallexample
6028
6029 @need 1250
6030 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6031
6032 @smallexample
6033 @group
6034 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6035 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6036 (interactive "P")
6037 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6038 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6039 (push-mark))
6040 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6041 (goto-char
6042 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6043 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6044 @var{else-go-to}
6045 (point-min))))
6046 @var{do-nicety}
6047 @end group
6048 @end smallexample
6049
6050 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6051 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6052 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6053 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6054 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6055
6056 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6057 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6058 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6059 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6060 Manual}.)
6061
6062 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6063 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6064 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6065 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6066 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6067 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6068 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6069
6070 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6071 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6072 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6073 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6074 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6075 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6076 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6077 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6078 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6079 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6080 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6081 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6082 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6083 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6084 simplified form.
6085
6086 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6087 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6088
6089 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6090 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6091 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6092 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6093 like this:
6094
6095 @smallexample
6096 @group
6097 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6098 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6099 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6100 (/ size 10))
6101 (/
6102 (+ 10
6103 (*
6104 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6105 @end group
6106 @end smallexample
6107
6108 @menu
6109 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6110 * Large buffer case::
6111 * Small buffer case::
6112 @end menu
6113
6114 @ifnottex
6115 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer
6116 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6117 @end ifnottex
6118
6119 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6120 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6121 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6122 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6123
6124 @smallexample
6125 @group
6126 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6127 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6128 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6129 @end group
6130 @end smallexample
6131
6132 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6133 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6134 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6135 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6136 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6137 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6138 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6139 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6140 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6141
6142 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6143
6144 @node Large buffer case
6145 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6146
6147 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6148 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6149 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6150 that comes from the let expression.
6151
6152 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6153 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6154 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6155 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6156 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6157 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6158
6159 @need 800
6160 The line looks like this:
6161
6162 @smallexample
6163 (if (> size 10000)
6164 @end smallexample
6165
6166 @need 1200
6167 @noindent
6168 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6169 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6170
6171 @smallexample
6172 @group
6173 (*
6174 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6175 (/ size 10))
6176 @end group
6177 @end smallexample
6178
6179 @noindent
6180 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6181 @code{*}.
6182
6183 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6184 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6185 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6186 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6187 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6188 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6189
6190 @findex / @r{(division)}
6191 @cindex Division
6192 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6193 the numeric value by ten---the numeric value of the size of the
6194 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6195 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6196 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6197 multiplication.)
6198
6199 @need 1200
6200 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6201 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6202
6203 @smallexample
6204 @group
6205 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6206 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6207 @end group
6208 @end smallexample
6209
6210 @noindent
6211 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6212 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6213
6214 @need 1200
6215 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6216 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6217
6218 @smallexample
6219 @group
6220 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6221 (/ size 10)))
6222 @end group
6223 @end smallexample
6224
6225 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6226
6227 @node Small buffer case
6228 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6229
6230 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6231 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6232 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6233 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6234 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6235
6236 @need 800
6237 The code looks like this:
6238
6239 @c Keep this on one line.
6240 @smallexample
6241 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6242 @end smallexample
6243
6244 @need 1200
6245 @noindent
6246 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6247 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6248 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6249 enclosing expression:
6250
6251 @smallexample
6252 @group
6253 (/
6254 (+ 10
6255 (*
6256 size
6257 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6258 10))
6259 @end group
6260 @end smallexample
6261
6262 @need 1200
6263 @noindent
6264 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6265 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6266 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6267 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6268
6269 @smallexample
6270 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6271 @end smallexample
6272
6273 @noindent
6274 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6275 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6276 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6277 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6278 position in the buffer.
6279
6280 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6281 the cursor is moved to that point.
6282
6283 @need 1500
6284 @node beginning-of-buffer complete
6285 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6286
6287 @need 1000
6288 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6289 @sp 1
6290
6291 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6292 @smallexample
6293 @group
6294 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6295 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6296 leave mark at previous position.
6297 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6298 do not set mark at previous position.
6299 With numeric arg N,
6300 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6301
6302 If the buffer is narrowed,
6303 this command uses the beginning and size
6304 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6305 @end group
6306
6307 @group
6308 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6309 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6310 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6311 (interactive "P")
6312 (or (consp arg)
6313 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6314 (push-mark))
6315 @end group
6316 @group
6317 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6318 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6319 (+ (point-min)
6320 (if (> size 10000)
6321 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6322 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6323 (/ size 10))
6324 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6325 10)))
6326 (point-min))))
6327 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1)))
6328 @end group
6329 @end smallexample
6330
6331 @ignore
6332 From before GNU Emacs 22
6333 @smallexample
6334 @group
6335 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6336 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6337 leave mark at previous position.
6338 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6339 from the true beginning.
6340 @end group
6341 @group
6342 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6343 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6344 and does not set the mark."
6345 (interactive "P")
6346 (push-mark)
6347 @end group
6348 @group
6349 (goto-char
6350 (if arg
6351 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6352 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6353 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6354 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6355 @end group
6356 @group
6357 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6358 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6359 10))
6360 (point-min)))
6361 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6362 @end group
6363 @end smallexample
6364 @end ignore
6365
6366 @noindent
6367 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6368 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6369 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6370 the function.
6371
6372 @need 800
6373 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6374
6375 @smallexample
6376 \\[universal-argument]
6377 @end smallexample
6378
6379 @noindent
6380 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6381 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6382 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6383 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6384 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6385 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6386 information.)
6387
6388 @need 1200
6389 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6390 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6391 invoked with an argument:
6392
6393 @smallexample
6394 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1))
6395 @end smallexample
6396
6397 @noindent
6398 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6399 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6400 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6401 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6402 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6403 to draw complaints. (The @code{(not (consp arg))} portion is so that
6404 if you specify the command with a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number,
6405 that is to say, if the `raw prefix argument' is simply a cons cell,
6406 the command does not put you at the beginning of the second line.)
6407
6408 @node Second Buffer Related Review
6409 @section Review
6410
6411 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6412
6413 @table @code
6414 @item or
6415 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6416 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6417 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6418 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6419 others are true.
6420
6421 @item and
6422 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6423 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6424 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6425 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6426 true.
6427
6428 @item &optional
6429 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6430 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6431 argument, if desired.
6432
6433 @item prefix-numeric-value
6434 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6435 "P")} to a numeric value.
6436
6437 @item forward-line
6438 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6439 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6440 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6441 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6442 supposed to move but couldn't.
6443
6444 @item erase-buffer
6445 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6446
6447 @item bufferp
6448 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6449 @end table
6450
6451 @node optional Exercise
6452 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6453
6454 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6455 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6456 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6457 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6458 56 as a default value.
6459
6460 @node Narrowing & Widening
6461 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6462 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6463 @cindex Narrowing
6464 @cindex Widening
6465
6466 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6467 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6468 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6469 novices.
6470
6471 @menu
6472 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6473 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6474 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6475 * narrow Exercise::
6476 @end menu
6477
6478 @ifnottex
6479 @node Narrowing advantages
6480 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6481 @end ifnottex
6482
6483 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6484 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6485 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6486 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6487 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6488 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6489 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6490 narrowing just to the region you want.
6491 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6492
6493 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6494 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6495 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6496 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6497 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6498 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6499 @code{widen} command.
6500 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6501
6502 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6503 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6504 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6505 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6506 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6507 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6508 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function
6509 uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6510 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6511 situation.
6512
6513 @node save-restriction
6514 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6515 @findex save-restriction
6516
6517 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6518 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6519 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6520 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6521 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6522 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6523 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6524 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6525 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6526 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6527 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6528 function.
6529
6530 @need 1250
6531 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6532
6533 @smallexample
6534 @group
6535 (save-restriction
6536 @var{body}@dots{} )
6537 @end group
6538 @end smallexample
6539
6540 @noindent
6541 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6542 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6543
6544 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6545 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6546 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6547 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6548 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6549 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6550 like this:
6551
6552 @smallexample
6553 @group
6554 (save-excursion
6555 (save-restriction
6556 @var{body}@dots{}))
6557 @end group
6558 @end smallexample
6559
6560 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6561 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6562 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6563
6564 @need 1250
6565 For example,
6566
6567 @smallexample
6568 @group
6569 (save-restriction
6570 (widen)
6571 (save-excursion
6572 @var{body}@dots{}))
6573 @end group
6574 @end smallexample
6575
6576 @ignore
6577 Emacs 22
6578 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6579
6580 (defun what-line ()
6581 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6582 (interactive)
6583 (let ((start (point-min))
6584 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6585 (if (= start 1)
6586 (message "Line %d" n)
6587 (save-excursion
6588 (save-restriction
6589 (widen)
6590 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6591 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6592
6593 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6594 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6595 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6596 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6597 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6598 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6599 (save-excursion
6600 (goto-char (point-min))
6601 (setq start (point))
6602 (goto-char opoint)
6603 (forward-line 0)
6604 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6605
6606 (defun count-lines (start end)
6607 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6608 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6609 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6610 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6611 (save-excursion
6612 (save-restriction
6613 (narrow-to-region start end)
6614 (goto-char (point-min))
6615 (if (eq selective-display t)
6616 (save-match-data
6617 (let ((done 0))
6618 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6619 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6620 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6621 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6622 (goto-char (point-max))
6623 (if (and (/= start end)
6624 (not (bolp)))
6625 (1+ done)
6626 done)))
6627 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6628 @end ignore
6629
6630 @node what-line
6631 @section @code{what-line}
6632 @findex what-line
6633 @cindex Widening, example of
6634
6635 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6636 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6637 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6638 original text of the function:
6639
6640 @smallexample
6641 @group
6642 (defun what-line ()
6643 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6644 (interactive)
6645 (save-restriction
6646 (widen)
6647 (save-excursion
6648 (beginning-of-line)
6649 (message "Line %d"
6650 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6651 @end group
6652 @end smallexample
6653
6654 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6655 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6656 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6657 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6658 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6659 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6660 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6661 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6662
6663 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6664 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6665 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6666 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6667
6668 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6669 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6670 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6671
6672 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6673 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6674 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6675
6676 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6677 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6678 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6679 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6680 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6681 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6682 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6683 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6684 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6685
6686 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6687 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6688 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6689 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6690
6691 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6692 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6693 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6694 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6695
6696 @need 1200
6697 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6698 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6699 echo area.
6700
6701 @smallexample
6702 @group
6703 (message "Line %d"
6704 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6705 @end group
6706 @end smallexample
6707
6708 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6709 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6710 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6711 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6712 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6713 @samp{Line 243}.
6714
6715 @need 1200
6716 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6717 last line of the function:
6718
6719 @smallexample
6720 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6721 @end smallexample
6722
6723 @ignore
6724 GNU Emacs 22
6725
6726 (defun count-lines (start end)
6727 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6728 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6729 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6730 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6731 (save-excursion
6732 (save-restriction
6733 (narrow-to-region start end)
6734 (goto-char (point-min))
6735 (if (eq selective-display t)
6736 (save-match-data
6737 (let ((done 0))
6738 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6739 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6740 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6741 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6742 (goto-char (point-max))
6743 (if (and (/= start end)
6744 (not (bolp)))
6745 (1+ done)
6746 done)))
6747 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6748 @end ignore
6749
6750 @noindent
6751 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6752 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6753 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6754 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6755 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6756 current line.
6757
6758 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6759 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6760 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6761 the original narrowing, if any.
6762
6763 @node narrow Exercise
6764 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6765
6766 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6767 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6768 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6769 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6770 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6771 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6772 @code{buffer-substring}.
6773
6774 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6775 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6776 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6777 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6778 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6779 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6780 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6781 Manual}.)
6782
6783 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6784 Or can you write the function without them?
6785
6786 @node car cdr & cons
6787 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6788 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6789 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6790
6791 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6792 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6793 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6794
6795 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6796 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6797 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6798
6799 @menu
6800 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6801 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6802 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6803 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6804 * nth::
6805 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6806 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6807 * cons Exercise::
6808 @end menu
6809
6810 @ifnottex
6811 @node Strange Names
6812 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6813 @end ifnottex
6814
6815 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6816 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6817 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6818 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6819 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6820 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6821 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6822 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6823 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6824 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6825 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6826 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6827 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6828 introduction.
6829
6830 @node car & cdr
6831 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6832
6833 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6834 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6835 @code{rose}.
6836
6837 @need 1200
6838 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
6839 evaluating the following:
6840
6841 @smallexample
6842 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6843 @end smallexample
6844
6845 @noindent
6846 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
6847 area.
6848
6849 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
6850 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
6851
6852 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
6853 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
6854 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
6855 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
6856
6857 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
6858 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
6859 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
6860 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
6861 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
6862 buttercup)}.
6863
6864 @need 800
6865 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
6866
6867 @smallexample
6868 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6869 @end smallexample
6870
6871 @noindent
6872 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
6873 the echo area.
6874
6875 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
6876 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
6877 elements are.
6878
6879 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
6880 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
6881 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
6882
6883 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
6884
6885 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
6886 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
6887 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
6888 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
6889 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
6890 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
6891 after you will be grateful to you.)
6892
6893 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
6894 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
6895 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
6896 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
6897 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
6898 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
6899 the usual way:
6900
6901 @smallexample
6902 @group
6903 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
6904
6905 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
6906 @end group
6907 @end smallexample
6908
6909 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
6910 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
6911 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
6912 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
6913
6914 @smallexample
6915 @group
6916 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
6917 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6918 (whale dolphin seal)))
6919 @end group
6920 @end smallexample
6921
6922 @noindent
6923 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
6924 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
6925 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
6926
6927 @smallexample
6928 @group
6929 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
6930 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6931 (whale dolphin seal)))
6932 @end group
6933 @end smallexample
6934
6935 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
6936 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
6937 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
6938
6939 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
6940 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
6941 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
6942 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
6943 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
6944 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
6945 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
6946 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
6947 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
6948 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
6949 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
6950 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
6951
6952 @node cons
6953 @section @code{cons}
6954 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
6955
6956 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
6957 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
6958 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
6959
6960 @smallexample
6961 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
6962 @end smallexample
6963
6964 @need 800
6965 @noindent
6966 After evaluating this list, you will see
6967
6968 @smallexample
6969 (pine fir oak maple)
6970 @end smallexample
6971
6972 @noindent
6973 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
6974 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
6975 list.
6976
6977 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
6978 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
6979 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
6980 existing list, but creates a new one.
6981
6982 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
6983
6984 @menu
6985 * Build a list::
6986 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
6987 @end menu
6988
6989 @ifnottex
6990 @node Build a list
6991 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
6992 @end ifnottex
6993
6994 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
6995 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
6996 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
6997 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
6998 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
6999 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7000 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7001 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7002 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7003 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7004
7005 @smallexample
7006 @group
7007 (cons 'buttercup ())
7008 @result{} (buttercup)
7009 @end group
7010
7011 @group
7012 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7013 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7014 @end group
7015
7016 @group
7017 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7018 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7019 @end group
7020
7021 @group
7022 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7023 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7024 @end group
7025 @end smallexample
7026
7027 @noindent
7028 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7029 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7030 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7031 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7032 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7033 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7034
7035 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7036 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7037 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7038 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7039
7040 @node length
7041 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7042 @findex length
7043
7044 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7045 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7046
7047 @smallexample
7048 @group
7049 (length '(buttercup))
7050 @result{} 1
7051 @end group
7052
7053 @group
7054 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7055 @result{} 2
7056 @end group
7057
7058 @group
7059 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7060 @result{} 3
7061 @end group
7062 @end smallexample
7063
7064 @noindent
7065 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7066 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7067 its argument.
7068
7069 @need 1200
7070 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7071 empty list:
7072
7073 @smallexample
7074 @group
7075 (length ())
7076 @result{} 0
7077 @end group
7078 @end smallexample
7079
7080 @noindent
7081 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7082
7083 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7084 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7085 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7086
7087 @smallexample
7088 (length )
7089 @end smallexample
7090
7091 @need 800
7092 @noindent
7093 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7094
7095 @smallexample
7096 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7097 @end smallexample
7098
7099 @noindent
7100 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7101 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7102 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7103 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7104 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7105
7106 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7107 the function.
7108
7109 @ignore
7110 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7111
7112 In an earlier version:
7113 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7114 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7115 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7116 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7117 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7118 about subroutines.
7119 @end ignore
7120
7121 @node nthcdr
7122 @section @code{nthcdr}
7123 @findex nthcdr
7124
7125 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7126 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7127
7128 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7129 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7130 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7131 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7132 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7133 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7134 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7135 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7136 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7137
7138 @need 1200
7139 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7140 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7141
7142 @smallexample
7143 @group
7144 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7145 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7146 @end group
7147
7148 @group
7149 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7150 @result{} (oak maple)
7151 @end group
7152
7153 @group
7154 (cdr '(oak maple))
7155 @result{}(maple)
7156 @end group
7157
7158 @group
7159 (cdr '(maple))
7160 @result{} nil
7161 @end group
7162
7163 @group
7164 (cdr 'nil)
7165 @result{} nil
7166 @end group
7167
7168 @group
7169 (cdr ())
7170 @result{} nil
7171 @end group
7172 @end smallexample
7173
7174 @need 1200
7175 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7176 between, like this:
7177
7178 @smallexample
7179 @group
7180 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7181 @result{} (oak maple)
7182 @end group
7183 @end smallexample
7184
7185 @noindent
7186 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7187 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7188 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7189 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7190 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7191 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7192 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7193 first two elements.
7194
7195 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7196 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7197 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7198 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7199 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7200
7201 @smallexample
7202 @group
7203 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7204 @result{} (oak maple)
7205 @end group
7206 @end smallexample
7207
7208 @need 1200
7209 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7210 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7211 and 5:
7212
7213 @smallexample
7214 @group
7215 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7216 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7217 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7218 @end group
7219
7220 @group
7221 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7222 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7223 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7224 @end group
7225
7226 @group
7227 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7228 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7229 @result{} (maple)
7230 @end group
7231
7232 @group
7233 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7234 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7235 @result{} nil
7236 @end group
7237
7238 @group
7239 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7240 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7241 @result{} nil
7242 @end group
7243 @end smallexample
7244
7245 @node nth
7246 @section @code{nth}
7247 @findex nth
7248
7249 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7250 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7251 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7252
7253 @need 1500
7254 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7255 @code{nth} would be:
7256
7257 @smallexample
7258 @group
7259 (defun nth (n list)
7260 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7261 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7262 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7263 @end group
7264 @end smallexample
7265
7266 @noindent
7267 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7268 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7269
7270 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7271 This can be very convenient.
7272
7273 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7274 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7275 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7276 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7277 is `one-based'.
7278
7279 @need 1250
7280 For example:
7281
7282 @smallexample
7283 @group
7284 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7285 @result{} "one"
7286
7287 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7288 @result{} "two"
7289 @end group
7290 @end smallexample
7291
7292 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7293 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7294 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7295 @code{setcdr} functions.
7296
7297 @node setcar
7298 @section @code{setcar}
7299 @findex setcar
7300
7301 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7302 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7303 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7304 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7305 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7306
7307 @need 1200
7308 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7309 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7310
7311 @smallexample
7312 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7313 @end smallexample
7314
7315 @noindent
7316 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7317 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7318 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7319 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7320 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7321 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7322 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7323 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7324 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7325 parenthesis.)
7326
7327 @need 1200
7328 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7329 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7330
7331 @smallexample
7332 @group
7333 animals
7334 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7335 @end group
7336 @end smallexample
7337
7338 @noindent
7339 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7340 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7341
7342 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7343 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7344 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7345 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7346 usual fashion:
7347
7348 @smallexample
7349 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7350 @end smallexample
7351
7352 @need 1200
7353 @noindent
7354 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7355 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7356
7357 @smallexample
7358 @group
7359 animals
7360 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7361 @end group
7362 @end smallexample
7363
7364 @noindent
7365 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7366 @code{hippopotamus}.
7367
7368 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7369 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7370 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7371
7372 @node setcdr
7373 @section @code{setcdr}
7374 @findex setcdr
7375
7376 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7377 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7378 a list rather than the first element.
7379
7380 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7381 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7382 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7383
7384 @need 1200
7385 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7386 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7387
7388 @smallexample
7389 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7390 @end smallexample
7391
7392 @need 1200
7393 @noindent
7394 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7395 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7396
7397 @smallexample
7398 @group
7399 domesticated-animals
7400 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7401 @end group
7402 @end smallexample
7403
7404 @need 1200
7405 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7406 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7407 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7408
7409 @smallexample
7410 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7411 @end smallexample
7412
7413 @noindent
7414 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7415 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7416 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7417 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7418
7419 @smallexample
7420 @group
7421 domesticated-animals
7422 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7423 @end group
7424 @end smallexample
7425
7426 @noindent
7427 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7428 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7429 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7430
7431 @node cons Exercise
7432 @section Exercise
7433
7434 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7435 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7436 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7437 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7438
7439 @node Cutting & Storing Text
7440 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7441 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7442 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7443 @cindex Killing text
7444 @cindex Clipping text
7445 @cindex Erasing text
7446 @cindex Deleting text
7447
7448 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7449 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7450 `yank' command.
7451
7452 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7453 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7454 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7455 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7456 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7457 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7458 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7459
7460 @menu
7461 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7462 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7463 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7464 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7465 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7466 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7467 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7468 * search Exercises::
7469 @end menu
7470
7471 @ifnottex
7472 @node Storing Text
7473 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7474 @end ifnottex
7475
7476 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7477 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7478 look like this:
7479
7480 @smallexample
7481 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7482 @end smallexample
7483
7484 @need 1200
7485 @noindent
7486 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7487 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7488 this:
7489
7490 @smallexample
7491 @group
7492 (cons "another piece"
7493 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7494 @end group
7495 @end smallexample
7496
7497 @need 1200
7498 @noindent
7499 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7500 the echo area:
7501
7502 @smallexample
7503 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7504 @end smallexample
7505
7506 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7507 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7508 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7509 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7510 second element of the original list:
7511
7512 @smallexample
7513 @group
7514 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7515 "a piece of text"
7516 "previous piece")))
7517 @result{} "a piece of text"
7518 @end group
7519 @end smallexample
7520
7521 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7522 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7523 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7524 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7525 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7526 than nothing at all.
7527
7528 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7529 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7530 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7531 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7532 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7533 climb the foothills.
7534
7535 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7536 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7537
7538 @node zap-to-char
7539 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7540 @findex zap-to-char
7541
7542 Let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7543
7544 @menu
7545 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7546 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7547 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7548 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7549 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7550 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7551 @end menu
7552
7553 @ifnottex
7554 @node Complete zap-to-char
7555 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7556 @end ifnottex
7557
7558 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7559 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7560 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7561 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7562 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7563 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7564 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7565 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7566 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7567 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7568
7569 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7570 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7571 any text.
7572
7573 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7574 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7575 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7576 deletion command.
7577
7578 @ignore
7579 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7580 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7581 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7582 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7583 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7584 (kill-region (point)
7585 (progn
7586 (search-forward
7587 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7588 (point))))
7589 @end ignore
7590
7591 @need 1250
7592 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7593
7594 @c GNU Emacs 22
7595 @smallexample
7596 @group
7597 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7598 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7599 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7600 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7601 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7602 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7603 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7604 (kill-region (point) (progn
7605 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7606 nil nil arg)
7607 (point))))
7608 @end group
7609 @end smallexample
7610
7611 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7612 of the word `kill'.
7613
7614 @node zap-to-char interactive
7615 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7616
7617 @need 800
7618 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7619 this:
7620
7621 @smallexample
7622 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7623 @end smallexample
7624
7625 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7626 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7627 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7628 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7629 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7630 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7631 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7632 this argument.
7633
7634 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7635 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7636 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7637 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7638 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7639 make it look good).
7640
7641 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7642 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7643
7644 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7645 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7646 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7647 beep or blink at you.
7648
7649 @node zap-to-char body
7650 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7651
7652 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7653 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7654 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7655
7656 The first part of the code looks like this:
7657
7658 @smallexample
7659 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7660 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7661 (kill-region (point) (progn
7662 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7663 (point)))
7664 @end smallexample
7665
7666 @noindent
7667 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7668 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7669 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7670 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7671 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7672 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7673 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7674 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7675
7676 @noindent
7677 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7678
7679 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7680 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7681 @code{point}.
7682
7683 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7684 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7685 then at @code{progn}.
7686
7687 @node search-forward
7688 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7689 @findex search-forward
7690
7691 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7692 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7693 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7694 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7695 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7696 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7697 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7698 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7699 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7700 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7701
7702 @need 1250
7703 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7704
7705 @smallexample
7706 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7707 @end smallexample
7708
7709 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7710
7711 @enumerate
7712 @item
7713 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7714 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7715
7716 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7717 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7718 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7719 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7720 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7721 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7722 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7723 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7724 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7725 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7726 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7727 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7728
7729 @item
7730 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7731 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7732 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7733
7734 @item
7735 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7736 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7737 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7738 signal an error when the search fails.
7739
7740 @item
7741 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7742 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7743 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7744 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7745 backwards.
7746 @end enumerate
7747
7748 @need 800
7749 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7750
7751 @smallexample
7752 @group
7753 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7754 @var{limit-of-search}
7755 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7756 @var{repeat-count})
7757 @end group
7758 @end smallexample
7759
7760 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7761
7762 @node progn
7763 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7764 @findex progn
7765
7766 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7767 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7768 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7769 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7770
7771 @need 800
7772 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7773
7774 @smallexample
7775 @group
7776 (progn
7777 @var{body}@dots{})
7778 @end group
7779 @end smallexample
7780
7781 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7782 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7783 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7784
7785 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7786 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7787 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7788 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7789 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7790 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7791
7792 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7793 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7794 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7795 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7796 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7797 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7798 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7799 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7800 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7801
7802 @node Summing up zap-to-char
7803 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7804
7805 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7806 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7807
7808 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7809 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7810 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
7811 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
7812 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
7813 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
7814 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
7815
7816 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
7817 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
7818 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
7819 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
7820 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
7821 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
7822
7823 @node kill-region
7824 @section @code{kill-region}
7825 @findex kill-region
7826
7827 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
7828 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
7829 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
7830
7831 @ignore
7832 GNU Emacs 22:
7833
7834 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
7835 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7836 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7837 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
7838 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
7839
7840 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
7841 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
7842
7843 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
7844 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
7845 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
7846
7847 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
7848 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
7849 to be killed.
7850 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
7851 If the previous command was also a kill command,
7852 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
7853 to make one entry in the kill ring.
7854
7855 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
7856 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
7857 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
7858 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
7859 ;; when calling kill-append.
7860 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7861 (unless (and beg end)
7862 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7863 (condition-case nil
7864 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7865 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7866 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7867 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7868 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7869 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7870 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7871 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7872 nil)
7873 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
7874 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
7875 ;; in the region, are read-only.
7876 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
7877 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
7878 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
7879 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
7880 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
7881 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
7882 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
7883 (if kill-read-only-ok
7884 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
7885 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
7886 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
7887 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
7888 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
7889 @end ignore
7890
7891 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
7892 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
7893 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
7894
7895 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
7896 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
7897 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
7898 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
7899 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
7900
7901 @menu
7902 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
7903 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
7904 * Lisp macro::
7905 @end menu
7906
7907 @ifnottex
7908 @node Complete kill-region
7909 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
7910 @end ifnottex
7911
7912 @need 1200
7913 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
7914 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
7915 added:
7916
7917 @c GNU Emacs 22:
7918 @smallexample
7919 @group
7920 (defun kill-region (beg end)
7921 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7922 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7923 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
7924 @end group
7925
7926 @group
7927 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
7928 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7929 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
7930 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
7931 (unless (and beg end)
7932 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7933 @end group
7934
7935 @group
7936 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
7937 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
7938 ;; information about the error signal is not
7939 ;; stored for use by another function.
7940 (condition-case nil
7941 @end group
7942
7943 @group
7944 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
7945 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
7946 @end group
7947
7948 @group
7949 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
7950 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
7951 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
7952 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
7953 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
7954 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
7955 ;; `kill-new', is called.
7956 @end group
7957
7958 @group
7959 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
7960 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
7961 ;; item in the kill ring.
7962 @end group
7963
7964 @group
7965 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
7966 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
7967 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
7968 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
7969 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
7970 ;; be `kill-region'.
7971 @end group
7972 @group
7973 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7974 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7975 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7976 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7977 @end group
7978 @group
7979 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
7980 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
7981 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
7982 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
7983 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7984 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7985 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7986 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7987 nil)
7988 @end group
7989
7990 @group
7991 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
7992 ;; what to do with an error.
7993 @end group
7994 @group
7995 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
7996 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
7997 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
7998 ;; then the body is executed.
7999 @end group
8000 @group
8001 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8002 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8003 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8004 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8005 @end group
8006 @group
8007 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8008 ;; it will be set in an error
8009 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8010 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8011 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8012 ;; don't if you may not.
8013 @end group
8014 @group
8015 (if kill-read-only-ok
8016 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8017 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8018 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8019 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8020 @end group
8021 @end smallexample
8022
8023 @ignore
8024 @c v 21
8025 @smallexample
8026 @group
8027 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8028 "Kill between point and mark.
8029 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8030 (interactive "r")
8031 @end group
8032
8033 @group
8034 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8035 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8036 ;; information about the error signal is not
8037 ;; stored for use by another function.
8038 (condition-case nil
8039 @end group
8040
8041 @group
8042 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8043 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8044 @end group
8045
8046 @group
8047 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8048 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8049 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8050 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8051 @end group
8052
8053 @group
8054 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8055 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8056 ;; previous command.
8057 @end group
8058 @group
8059 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8060 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8061 (when string
8062 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8063 ;; if true, prepend string
8064 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8065 (kill-new string)))
8066 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8067 @end group
8068
8069 @group
8070 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8071 ;; what to do with an error.
8072 @end group
8073 @group
8074 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8075 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8076 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8077 ;; then the body is executed.
8078 @end group
8079 @group
8080 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8081 ;; then...
8082 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8083 @end group
8084 @group
8085 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8086 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8087 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8088 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8089 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8090 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8091 @end group
8092 @end smallexample
8093 @end ignore
8094
8095 @node condition-case
8096 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8097 @findex condition-case
8098
8099 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8100 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8101 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8102 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8103 shows you a message.
8104
8105 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8106 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8107 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8108 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8109 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8110 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8111 special form.
8112
8113 @need 800
8114 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8115
8116 @smallexample
8117 @group
8118 (condition-case
8119 @var{var}
8120 @var{bodyform}
8121 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8122 @end group
8123 @end smallexample
8124
8125 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8126 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8127 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8128 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8129
8130 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8131 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8132 correctly.
8133
8134 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8135 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8136 names.
8137
8138 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8139 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8140 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8141 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8142 part of the error handler is run.
8143
8144 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8145 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8146
8147 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8148 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8149 handler is run.
8150
8151 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8152 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8153 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8154 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8155 discarded.
8156
8157 @need 1200
8158 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8159 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8160
8161 @smallexample
8162 @group
8163 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8164 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8165 @end group
8166 @end smallexample
8167
8168 @ignore
8169 2006 Oct 24
8170 In Emacs 22,
8171 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8172 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8173 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8174 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8175
8176 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8177 this is line 8054
8178 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8179 @end ignore
8180
8181 @node Lisp macro
8182 @subsection Lisp macro
8183 @cindex Macro, lisp
8184 @cindex Lisp macro
8185
8186 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8187 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8188 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8189 text that exists.
8190
8191 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8192 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8193 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8194 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8195
8196 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp macro
8197 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8198 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8199 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8200 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8201
8202 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8203 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8204 an @code{if} without a then clause
8205
8206 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8207 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8208 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8209
8210 @ignore
8211 We will briefly look at C macros in
8212 @ref{Digression into C}.
8213 @end ignore
8214
8215 @need 1200
8216 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8217 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8218 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8219 and an else-part.
8220
8221 @smallexample
8222 @group
8223 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8224 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8225 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8226 @end group
8227 @end smallexample
8228
8229 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8230 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8231
8232 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8233 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8234 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8235
8236 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8237 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8238 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8239
8240 @need 1200
8241 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8242 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8243
8244 @smallexample
8245 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8246 @end smallexample
8247
8248 @noindent
8249 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8250 clipped text in the kill ring.
8251
8252 @node copy-region-as-kill
8253 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8254 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8255 @findex nthcdr
8256
8257 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8258 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8259 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8260
8261 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8262 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8263 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8264 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8265 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8266 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8267
8268 @menu
8269 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8270 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8271 @end menu
8272
8273 @ifnottex
8274 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill
8275 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8276 @end ifnottex
8277
8278 @need 1200
8279 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8280 function:
8281
8282 @smallexample
8283 @group
8284 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8285 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8286 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8287 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8288 system cut and paste."
8289 (interactive "r")
8290 @end group
8291 @group
8292 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8293 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8294 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8295 @end group
8296 @group
8297 (if transient-mark-mode
8298 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8299 nil)
8300 @end group
8301 @end smallexample
8302
8303 @need 800
8304 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8305
8306 @smallexample
8307 @group
8308 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8309 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8310 (interactive "r")
8311 @var{body}@dots{})
8312 @end group
8313 @end smallexample
8314
8315 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8316 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8317 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading through this
8318 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8319 almost becoming routine.
8320
8321 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8322 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8323 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8324 side-effects.
8325
8326 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8327 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8328 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8329 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8330 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8331 highlighted.)
8332
8333 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8334 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8335 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8336 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8337 ring.
8338
8339 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8340 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8341 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8342 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8343 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8344 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8345 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8346
8347 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8348 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8349
8350 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8351
8352 @node copy-region-as-kill body
8353 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8354
8355 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8356 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8357 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8358 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8359 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8360 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8361 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8362 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8363 order.
8364
8365 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8366 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8367 previous Emacs command.
8368
8369 @menu
8370 * last-command & this-command::
8371 * kill-append function::
8372 * kill-new function::
8373 @end menu
8374
8375 @ifnottex
8376 @node last-command & this-command
8377 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8378 @end ifnottex
8379
8380 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8381 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8382 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8383 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8384 @code{this-command}.
8385
8386 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8387 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8388 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8389 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8390 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8391 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8392 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8393 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8394 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8395 function.
8396
8397 @need 1250
8398 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8399
8400 @smallexample
8401 @group
8402 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8403 ;; @r{then-part}
8404 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8405 ;; @r{else-part}
8406 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8407 @end group
8408 @end smallexample
8409
8410 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8411 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8412 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8413 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8414 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8415 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8416 properties were implemented.)
8417
8418 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8419 @noindent
8420 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8421 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8422 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8423 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8424 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8425 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8426 expressions are the same.
8427
8428 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8429 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8430
8431 @node kill-append function
8432 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8433 @findex kill-append
8434
8435 @need 800
8436 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8437
8438 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8439 @smallexample
8440 @group
8441 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8442 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8443 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8444 @dots{} "
8445 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8446 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8447 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8448 (equal yank-handler
8449 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8450 yank-handler)))
8451 @end group
8452 @end smallexample
8453
8454 @ignore
8455 was:
8456 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8457 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8458 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8459 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8460 it."
8461 (kill-new (if before-p
8462 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8463 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8464 t))
8465 @end ignore
8466
8467 @noindent
8468 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8469 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8470 a moment.
8471
8472 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8473 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8474 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8475 `italics'.)
8476
8477 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8478 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8479 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8480 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8481 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8482
8483 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8484 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8485 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8486 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8487
8488 @smallexample
8489 @group
8490 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8491 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8492 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8493 @end group
8494 @end smallexample
8495
8496 @noindent
8497 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8498 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8499 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8500 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8501 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8502 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8503 previously saved text.
8504
8505 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8506 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8507 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8508 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8509 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8510 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8511 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8512 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8513 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8514 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8515 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8516 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8517 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8518 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8519
8520 @need 800
8521 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8522 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8523
8524 @smallexample
8525 (concat string cur)
8526 @end smallexample
8527
8528 @need 1200
8529 @noindent
8530 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8531 after the old text:
8532
8533 @smallexample
8534 (concat cur string))
8535 @end smallexample
8536
8537 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8538 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8539 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8540
8541 @smallexample
8542 @group
8543 (concat "abc" "def")
8544 @result{} "abcdef"
8545 @end group
8546
8547 @group
8548 (concat "new "
8549 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8550 @result{} "new first element"
8551
8552 (concat (car
8553 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8554 @result{} "first element modified"
8555 @end group
8556 @end smallexample
8557
8558 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8559 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8560 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8561 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8562
8563 @node kill-new function
8564 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8565 @findex kill-new
8566
8567 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8568 @ignore
8569 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8570 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8571 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8572 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8573
8574 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8575 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8576 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8577 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8578 @end ignore
8579 @need 1200
8580 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8581
8582 @smallexample
8583 @group
8584 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8585 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8586 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8587
8588 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8589 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8590 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8591 @dots{}"
8592 @end group
8593 @group
8594 (if (> (length string) 0)
8595 (if yank-handler
8596 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8597 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8598 (if yank-handler
8599 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8600 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8601 @end group
8602 @group
8603 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8604 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8605 @end group
8606 @group
8607 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8608 (setcar kill-ring string)
8609 (push string kill-ring)
8610 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8611 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8612 @end group
8613 @group
8614 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8615 (if interprogram-cut-function
8616 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8617 @end group
8618 @end smallexample
8619 @ignore
8620 was:
8621 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8622 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8623 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8624 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8625 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8626 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8627 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8628 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8629 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8630 (setcar kill-ring string)
8631 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8632 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8633 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8634 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8635 (if interprogram-cut-function
8636 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8637 @end ignore
8638
8639 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8640
8641 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8642
8643 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8644 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8645 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8646
8647 @need 1200
8648 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8649
8650 @smallexample
8651 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8652 @end smallexample
8653
8654 @noindent
8655 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8656
8657 @noindent
8658 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8659 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8660 them below.
8661
8662 @need 1200
8663 The critical lines are these:
8664
8665 @smallexample
8666 @group
8667 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8668 ;; @r{then}
8669 (setcar kill-ring string)
8670 @end group
8671 @group
8672 ;; @r{else}
8673 (push string kill-ring)
8674 @end group
8675 @group
8676 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8677 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8678 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8679 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8680 @end group
8681 @group
8682 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8683 (if interprogram-cut-function
8684 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8685 @end group
8686 @end smallexample
8687
8688 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8689 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8690 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8691
8692 @need 1250
8693 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8694 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8695 expression is executed:
8696
8697 @smallexample
8698 (setcar kill-ring string)
8699 @end smallexample
8700
8701 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8702 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8703 first element.
8704
8705 @need 1250
8706 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8707 else-part of the condition is executed:
8708
8709 @smallexample
8710 (push string kill-ring)
8711 @end smallexample
8712
8713 @noindent
8714 @need 1250
8715 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8716 the older
8717
8718 @smallexample
8719 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8720 @end smallexample
8721
8722 @noindent
8723 @need 1250
8724 or the newer
8725
8726 @smallexample
8727 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8728 @end smallexample
8729
8730 @noindent
8731 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8732 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8733 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8734 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8735 ring from growing too long.
8736
8737 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8738
8739 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8740 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8741 kill ring.
8742
8743 We can see how this works with an example.
8744
8745 @need 800
8746 First,
8747
8748 @smallexample
8749 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8750 @end smallexample
8751
8752 @need 1200
8753 @noindent
8754 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8755 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8756
8757 @smallexample
8758 @group
8759 example-list
8760 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8761 @end group
8762 @end smallexample
8763
8764 @need 1200
8765 @noindent
8766 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8767 following expression:
8768 @findex push, @r{example}
8769
8770 @smallexample
8771 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8772 @end smallexample
8773
8774 @need 800
8775 @noindent
8776 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8777
8778 @smallexample
8779 @group
8780 example-list
8781 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8782 @end group
8783 @end smallexample
8784
8785 @noindent
8786 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8787
8788 @need 1200
8789 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8790 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8791
8792 @smallexample
8793 @group
8794 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8795 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8796 @end group
8797 @end smallexample
8798
8799 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8800 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8801 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8802 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8803 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8804 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8805
8806 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
8807 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
8808 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
8809 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
8810 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
8811 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
8812 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
8813 the last element of the kill ring.
8814
8815 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
8816 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
8817 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
8818 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
8819 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
8820
8821 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
8822 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
8823 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
8824 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
8825 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
8826 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
8827 @code{setcdr}}.)
8828
8829 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
8830 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
8831 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
8832 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
8833
8834 @smallexample
8835 @group
8836 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
8837 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
8838 @end group
8839
8840 @group
8841 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
8842 @result{} nil
8843
8844 trees
8845 @result{} (maple oak pine)
8846 @end group
8847 @end smallexample
8848
8849 @noindent
8850 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
8851 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
8852
8853 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
8854 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
8855 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
8856 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
8857 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
8858
8859 @need 800
8860 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
8861
8862 @smallexample
8863 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8864 @end smallexample
8865
8866 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
8867 the @code{kill-ring}.
8868
8869 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
8870 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
8871 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
8872
8873 @need 1200
8874 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
8875
8876 @smallexample
8877 @group
8878 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8879 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8880 @end group
8881 @end smallexample
8882
8883 @noindent
8884 It starts with an @code{if} expression
8885
8886 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
8887 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
8888 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
8889 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
8890 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
8891 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
8892 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
8893
8894 @noindent
8895 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
8896 function @code{and}.
8897
8898 @findex and
8899 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
8900 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
8901 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
8902 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
8903 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
8904 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
8905 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
8906 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
8907
8908 The expression determines whether the second argument to
8909 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
8910 @ignore
8911 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
8912 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
8913 @end ignore
8914
8915 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
8916 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
8917 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
8918 have saved and select one piece to paste.
8919
8920 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
8921 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
8922 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
8923 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
8924 the string and stores it in memory operated by X@. You can paste the
8925 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
8926
8927 @need 1200
8928 The expression looks like this:
8929
8930 @smallexample
8931 @group
8932 (if interprogram-cut-function
8933 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8934 @end group
8935 @end smallexample
8936
8937 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
8938 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
8939 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
8940 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
8941 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
8942
8943 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
8944 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
8945 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
8946
8947 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
8948 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
8949 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
8950 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
8951 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
8952 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
8953 that, we will digress into C.
8954
8955 @ignore
8956 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
8957
8958 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
8959 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
8960 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
8961 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
8962
8963 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
8964 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
8965 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
8966 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
8967 order is correct.)
8968
8969 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
8970 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
8971 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
8972 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
8973 @end ignore
8974 @ignore
8975
8976 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
8977 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
8978
8979 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
8980 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
8981
8982 2006 Oct 24
8983 In Emacs 22,
8984 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8985 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8986 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8987 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8988
8989 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8990 @end ignore
8991
8992 @node Digression into C
8993 @section Digression into C
8994 @findex delete-and-extract-region
8995 @cindex C, a digression into
8996 @cindex Digression into C
8997
8998 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
8999 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9000 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9001 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9002 back.
9003
9004 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9005 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9006 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9007 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9008 describe it here.
9009
9010 @c GNU Emacs 24 in src/editfns.c
9011 @c the DEFUN for delete-and-extract-region
9012
9013 @need 1500
9014 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9015 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9016 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9017 like this:
9018
9019 @smallexample
9020 @group
9021 DEFUN ("delete-and-extract-region", Fdelete_and_extract_region,
9022 Sdelete_and_extract_region, 2, 2, 0,
9023 doc: /* Delete the text between START and END and return it. */)
9024 (Lisp_Object start, Lisp_Object end)
9025 @{
9026 validate_region (&start, &end);
9027 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9028 return empty_unibyte_string;
9029 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9030 @}
9031 @end group
9032 @end smallexample
9033
9034 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9035 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9036 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9037 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9038 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9039
9040 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9041 parentheses:
9042
9043 @itemize @bullet
9044 @item
9045 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9046 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9047
9048 @item
9049 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9050 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9051 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9052 instead.
9053
9054 @item
9055 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9056 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9057 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9058
9059 @item
9060 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9061 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9062 arguments.
9063
9064 @item
9065 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9066 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9067 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9068 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9069 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9070
9071 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9072 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9073 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9074 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9075 and provides a prompt.
9076
9077 @item
9078 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9079 function written in Emacs Lisp. This is written as a C comment. (When
9080 you build Emacs, the program @command{lib-src/make-docfile} extracts
9081 these comments and uses them to make the ``real'' documentation.)
9082 @end itemize
9083
9084 @need 1200
9085 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9086 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9087 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9088 consists of the following four lines:
9089
9090 @smallexample
9091 @group
9092 validate_region (&start, &end);
9093 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9094 return empty_unibyte_string;
9095 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9096 @end group
9097 @end smallexample
9098
9099 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9100 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9101 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9102 then return an empty string.
9103
9104 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9105 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9106 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9107 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9108 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9109
9110 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9111 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9112 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9113 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9114 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9115
9116 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9117 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9118 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9119 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9120
9121 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9122 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9123
9124 @need 800
9125 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9126
9127 @smallexample
9128 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9129 @end smallexample
9130
9131 @noindent
9132 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9133 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9134
9135 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9136 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9137 all work.
9138
9139 @node defvar
9140 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9141 @findex defvar
9142 @cindex Initializing a variable
9143 @cindex Variable initialization
9144
9145 @ignore
9146 2006 Oct 24
9147 In Emacs 22,
9148 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9149 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9150 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9151 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9152
9153 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9154
9155 @end ignore
9156
9157 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9158 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9159 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9160 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9161 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9162 form.
9163
9164 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9165 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9166 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9167
9168 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9169 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9170 name comes from ``define variable''.
9171
9172 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9173 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9174 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9175 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9176 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9177 documentation string.
9178
9179 (There is a related macro, @code{defcustom}, designed for variables
9180 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9181 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9182
9183 @menu
9184 * See variable current value::
9185 * defvar and asterisk::
9186 @end menu
9187
9188 @ifnottex
9189 @node See variable current value
9190 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9191 @end ifnottex
9192
9193 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9194 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9195 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9196 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9197 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9198 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9199 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9200 @code{kill-ring}:
9201
9202 @smallexample
9203 @group
9204 Documentation:
9205 List of killed text sequences.
9206 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9207 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9208 @end group
9209 @group
9210 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9211 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9212 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9213 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9214 ring directly.
9215 @end group
9216 @end smallexample
9217
9218 @need 800
9219 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9220
9221 @smallexample
9222 @group
9223 (defvar kill-ring nil
9224 "List of killed text sequences.
9225 @dots{}")
9226 @end group
9227 @end smallexample
9228
9229 @noindent
9230 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9231 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9232 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9233 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9234 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9235 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9236 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9237 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9238 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9239
9240 @node defvar and asterisk
9241 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9242 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9243 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9244
9245 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9246 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9247 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9248 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9249 @code{defcustom} instead, since it provides a path into
9250 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9251 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9252
9253 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9254 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9255 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9256 documentation string. For example:
9257
9258 @smallexample
9259 @group
9260 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9261 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9262 @dots{} ")
9263 @end group
9264 @end smallexample
9265
9266 @findex set-variable
9267 @noindent
9268 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9269 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9270 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9271 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9272 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9273 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9274 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9275 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9276
9277 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9278 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9279 are now more than 700 such variables, far too many to remember
9280 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9281 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9282 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9283 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9284
9285 @need 1250
9286 @node cons & search-fwd Review
9287 @section Review
9288
9289 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9290
9291 @table @code
9292 @item car
9293 @itemx cdr
9294 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9295 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9296
9297 @need 1250
9298 For example:
9299
9300 @smallexample
9301 @group
9302 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9303 @result{} 1
9304 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9305 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9306 @end group
9307 @end smallexample
9308
9309 @item cons
9310 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9311 second argument.
9312
9313 @need 1250
9314 For example:
9315
9316 @smallexample
9317 @group
9318 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9319 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9320 @end group
9321 @end smallexample
9322
9323 @item funcall
9324 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9325 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9326
9327 @item nthcdr
9328 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9329 @iftex
9330 The
9331 @tex
9332 $n^{th}$
9333 @end tex
9334 @code{cdr}.
9335 @end iftex
9336 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9337
9338 @need 1250
9339 For example:
9340
9341 @smallexample
9342 @group
9343 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9344 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9345 @end group
9346 @end smallexample
9347
9348 @item setcar
9349 @itemx setcdr
9350 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9351 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9352
9353 @need 1250
9354 For example:
9355
9356 @smallexample
9357 @group
9358 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9359
9360 (setcar triple '37)
9361
9362 triple
9363 @result{} (37 2 3)
9364
9365 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9366
9367 triple
9368 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9369 @end group
9370 @end smallexample
9371
9372 @item progn
9373 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9374 last.
9375
9376 @need 1250
9377 For example:
9378
9379 @smallexample
9380 @group
9381 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9382 @result{} 4
9383 @end group
9384 @end smallexample
9385
9386 @item save-restriction
9387 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9388 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9389
9390 @item search-forward
9391 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9392 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9393 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9394 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9395
9396 @need 1250
9397 @noindent
9398 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9399 arguments:
9400
9401 @enumerate
9402 @item
9403 The string or regular expression to search for.
9404
9405 @item
9406 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9407
9408 @item
9409 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9410 error message.
9411
9412 @item
9413 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9414 search goes backwards.
9415 @end enumerate
9416
9417 @item kill-region
9418 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9419 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9420
9421 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9422 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9423 by yanking.
9424
9425 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9426 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9427 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9428 @end table
9429
9430 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9431 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9432 (This is not an interactive command.)
9433
9434 @need 1500
9435 @node search Exercises
9436 @section Searching Exercises
9437
9438 @itemize @bullet
9439 @item
9440 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9441 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9442 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9443 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9444 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9445 @code{test-search} instead.)
9446
9447 @item
9448 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9449 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9450 print an appropriate message.
9451 @end itemize
9452
9453 @node List Implementation
9454 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9455 @cindex Lists in a computer
9456
9457 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9458 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9459 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9460 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9461 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9462 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9463 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9464 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9465 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9466 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9467
9468 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9469 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9470
9471 @menu
9472 * Lists diagrammed::
9473 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9474 * List Exercise::
9475 @end menu
9476
9477 @ifnottex
9478 @node Lists diagrammed
9479 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9480 @end ifnottex
9481
9482 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9483 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9484 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9485 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9486 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9487 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9488 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9489
9490 @need 1200
9491 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9492
9493 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9494 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9495 @ifnottex
9496 @smallexample
9497 @group
9498 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9499 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9500 | | |
9501 | | |
9502 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9503 @end group
9504 @end smallexample
9505 @end ifnottex
9506 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9507 @sp 1
9508 @tex
9509 @center @image{cons-1}
9510 @end tex
9511 @sp 1
9512 @end ifset
9513 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9514 @iftex
9515 @smallexample
9516 @group
9517 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9518 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9519 | | |
9520 | | |
9521 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9522 @end group
9523 @end smallexample
9524 @end iftex
9525 @end ifclear
9526
9527 @noindent
9528 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9529 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9530 i.e., the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9531 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9532 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9533 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9534 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9535 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9536 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9537
9538 @need 1200
9539 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9540 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9541 evaluation of the expression
9542
9543 @smallexample
9544 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9545 @end smallexample
9546
9547 @need 1250
9548 @noindent
9549 creates a situation like this:
9550
9551 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9552 @ifnottex
9553 @smallexample
9554 @group
9555 bouquet
9556 |
9557 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9558 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9559 | | |
9560 | | |
9561 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9562 @end group
9563 @end smallexample
9564 @end ifnottex
9565 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9566 @sp 1
9567 @tex
9568 @center @image{cons-2}
9569 @end tex
9570 @sp 1
9571 @end ifset
9572 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9573 @iftex
9574 @smallexample
9575 @group
9576 bouquet
9577 |
9578 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9579 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9580 | | |
9581 | | |
9582 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9583 @end group
9584 @end smallexample
9585 @end iftex
9586 @end ifclear
9587
9588 @noindent
9589 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9590 pair of boxes.
9591
9592 @need 1200
9593 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9594 like this:
9595
9596 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9597 @ifnottex
9598 @smallexample
9599 @group
9600 bouquet
9601 |
9602 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9603 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9604 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9605 | | | | | | | cup | |
9606 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9607 @end group
9608 @end smallexample
9609 @end ifnottex
9610 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9611 @sp 1
9612 @tex
9613 @center @image{cons-2a}
9614 @end tex
9615 @sp 1
9616 @end ifset
9617 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9618 @iftex
9619 @smallexample
9620 @group
9621 bouquet
9622 |
9623 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9624 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9625 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9626 | | | | | | | cup | |
9627 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9628 @end group
9629 @end smallexample
9630 @end iftex
9631 @end ifclear
9632
9633 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9634 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9635 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9636 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9637 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9638 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9639 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9640 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9641 address-boxes for the list.)
9642
9643 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9644 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9645 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9646 evaluation of the following expression
9647
9648 @smallexample
9649 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9650 @end smallexample
9651
9652 @need 800
9653 @noindent
9654 produces this:
9655
9656 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9657 @ifnottex
9658 @sp 1
9659 @smallexample
9660 @group
9661 bouquet flowers
9662 | |
9663 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9664 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9665 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9666 | | |
9667 | | |
9668 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9669 @end group
9670 @end smallexample
9671 @sp 1
9672 @end ifnottex
9673 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9674 @sp 1
9675 @tex
9676 @center @image{cons-3}
9677 @end tex
9678 @sp 1
9679 @end ifset
9680 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9681 @iftex
9682 @sp 1
9683 @smallexample
9684 @group
9685 bouquet flowers
9686 | |
9687 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9688 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9689 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9690 | | |
9691 | | |
9692 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9693 @end group
9694 @end smallexample
9695 @sp 1
9696 @end iftex
9697 @end ifclear
9698
9699 @noindent
9700 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9701 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9702 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9703 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9704
9705 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9706 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9707 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9708 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9709 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9710
9711 @need 1200
9712 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9713 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9714 the expression
9715
9716 @smallexample
9717 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9718 @end smallexample
9719
9720 @need 1500
9721 @noindent
9722 produces:
9723
9724 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9725 @ifnottex
9726 @sp 1
9727 @smallexample
9728 @group
9729 bouquet flowers
9730 | |
9731 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9732 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9733 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9734 | | | |
9735 | | | |
9736 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9737 @end group
9738 @end smallexample
9739 @sp 1
9740 @end ifnottex
9741 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9742 @sp 1
9743 @tex
9744 @center @image{cons-4}
9745 @end tex
9746 @sp 1
9747 @end ifset
9748 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9749 @iftex
9750 @sp 1
9751 @smallexample
9752 @group
9753 bouquet flowers
9754 | |
9755 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9756 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9757 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9758 | | | |
9759 | | | |
9760 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9761 @end group
9762 @end smallexample
9763 @sp 1
9764 @end iftex
9765 @end ifclear
9766
9767 @need 1200
9768 @noindent
9769 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
9770 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
9771
9772 @smallexample
9773 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
9774 @end smallexample
9775
9776 @noindent
9777 which returns @code{t} for true.
9778
9779 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
9780 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
9781 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
9782 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
9783
9784 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
9785 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
9786 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
9787 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
9788 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
9789 brilliantly simple!
9790
9791 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
9792 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
9793
9794 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
9795 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
9796
9797 @node Symbols as Chest
9798 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9799 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9800 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
9801 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
9802
9803 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
9804 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
9805 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
9806 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
9807 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
9808
9809 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
9810 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
9811 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
9812 where the buried treasure lies.
9813
9814 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
9815 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
9816 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
9817 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9818 Reference Manual}.)
9819
9820 @need 1500
9821 Here is a fanciful representation:
9822
9823 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
9824 @ifnottex
9825 @sp 1
9826 @smallexample
9827 @group
9828 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9829
9830 __ o0O0o __
9831 / \
9832 ---------------------
9833 | directions to | [map to]
9834 | symbol name | bouquet
9835 | |
9836 +---------------------+
9837 | directions to |
9838 | symbol definition | [none]
9839 | |
9840 +---------------------+
9841 | directions to | [map to]
9842 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9843 | |
9844 +---------------------+
9845 | directions to |
9846 | property list | [not described here]
9847 | |
9848 +---------------------+
9849 |/ \|
9850 @end group
9851 @end smallexample
9852 @sp 1
9853 @end ifnottex
9854 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9855 @sp 1
9856 @tex
9857 @center @image{drawers}
9858 @end tex
9859 @sp 1
9860 @end ifset
9861 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9862 @iftex
9863 @sp 1
9864 @smallexample
9865 @group
9866 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9867
9868 __ o0O0o __
9869 / \
9870 ---------------------
9871 | directions to | [map to]
9872 | symbol name | bouquet
9873 | |
9874 +---------------------+
9875 | directions to |
9876 | symbol definition | [none]
9877 | |
9878 +---------------------+
9879 | directions to | [map to]
9880 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9881 | |
9882 +---------------------+
9883 | directions to |
9884 | property list | [not described here]
9885 | |
9886 +---------------------+
9887 |/ \|
9888 @end group
9889 @end smallexample
9890 @sp 1
9891 @end iftex
9892 @end ifclear
9893
9894 @node List Exercise
9895 @section Exercise
9896
9897 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
9898 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
9899 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
9900 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
9901
9902 @node Yanking
9903 @chapter Yanking Text Back
9904 @findex yank
9905 @cindex Text retrieval
9906 @cindex Retrieving text
9907 @cindex Pasting text
9908
9909 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
9910 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
9911 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
9912 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
9913 the original buffer).
9914
9915 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
9916 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
9917 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
9918 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
9919 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
9920 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
9921 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
9922 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
9923 that holds the text is a list.
9924 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
9925 list is handled as a ring.)
9926
9927 @menu
9928 * Kill Ring Overview::
9929 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
9930 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9931 @end menu
9932
9933 @node Kill Ring Overview
9934 @section Kill Ring Overview
9935 @cindex Kill ring overview
9936
9937 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
9938
9939 @smallexample
9940 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9941 @end smallexample
9942
9943 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
9944 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
9945 buffer where my cursor is located.
9946
9947 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
9948 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
9949 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
9950
9951 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
9952 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
9953 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
9954 which is used by the two other functions.
9955
9956 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
9957 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
9958 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
9959
9960 @smallexample
9961 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
9962 @end smallexample
9963
9964 @noindent
9965 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
9966 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
9967 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
9968 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
9969 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
9970 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
9971 is easier to understand.)
9972
9973 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
9974 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9975
9976 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer
9977 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
9978
9979 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
9980 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
9981 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
9982
9983 @need 1000
9984 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
9985
9986 @smallexample
9987 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9988 @end smallexample
9989
9990 @need 1250
9991 @noindent
9992 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
9993 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
9994
9995 @smallexample
9996 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9997 @end smallexample
9998
9999 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10000 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10001 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10002 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10003 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10004 text. Here is a diagram:
10005
10006 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10007 @ifnottex
10008 @smallexample
10009 @group
10010 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10011 | |
10012 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10013 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10014 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10015 | | |
10016 | | |
10017 | | --> "yet more text"
10018 | |
10019 | --> "a different piece of text"
10020 |
10021 --> "some text"
10022 @end group
10023 @end smallexample
10024 @sp 1
10025 @end ifnottex
10026 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10027 @sp 1
10028 @tex
10029 @center @image{cons-5}
10030 @end tex
10031 @sp 1
10032 @end ifset
10033 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10034 @iftex
10035 @smallexample
10036 @group
10037 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10038 | |
10039 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10040 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10041 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10042 | | |
10043 | | |
10044 | | --> "yet more text"
10045 | |
10046 | --> "a different piece of text
10047 |
10048 --> "some text"
10049 @end group
10050 @end smallexample
10051 @sp 1
10052 @end iftex
10053 @end ifclear
10054
10055 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10056 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10057 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10058 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10059 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10060 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10061
10062 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10063 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10064 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10065 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10066 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10067 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10068 inserted.
10069
10070 @ignore
10071 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10072
10073 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10074
10075 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10076 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10077 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10078 (interactive "p")
10079 (current-kill arg))
10080
10081 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10082 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10083 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10084 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10085 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10086 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10087 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10088 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10089 interprogram-paste-function
10090 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10091 (if interprogram-paste
10092 (progn
10093 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10094 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10095 ;; selection, with identical text.
10096 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10097 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10098 interprogram-paste)
10099 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10100 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10101 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10102 (length kill-ring))
10103 kill-ring)))
10104 (or do-not-move
10105 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10106 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10107
10108 @end ignore
10109
10110 @need 1500
10111 @node yank nthcdr Exercises
10112 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10113
10114 @itemize @bullet
10115 @item
10116 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10117 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10118 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10119 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10120 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10121 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10122
10123 @item
10124 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10125 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10126 @end itemize
10127
10128 @node Loops & Recursion
10129 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10130 @cindex Loops and recursion
10131 @cindex Recursion and loops
10132 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10133
10134 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10135 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10136 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10137
10138 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10139 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10140 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10141 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10142 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10143 have on humans.
10144
10145 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10146 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10147 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10148 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10149 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10150 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10151 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10152 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10153 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10154 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10155 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10156
10157 @menu
10158 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10159 * dolist dotimes::
10160 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10161 * Looping exercise::
10162 @end menu
10163
10164 @node while
10165 @section @code{while}
10166 @cindex Loops
10167 @findex while
10168
10169 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10170 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10171 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10172 next, however, is different.
10173
10174 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10175 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10176 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10177 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10178 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10179 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10180 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10181 body of the expression.
10182
10183 @need 1200
10184 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10185
10186 @smallexample
10187 @group
10188 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10189 @var{body}@dots{})
10190 @end group
10191 @end smallexample
10192
10193 @menu
10194 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10195 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10196 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10197 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10198 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10199 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10200 @end menu
10201
10202 @ifnottex
10203 @node Looping with while
10204 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10205 @end ifnottex
10206
10207 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10208 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10209 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10210 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10211 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10212 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10213 expression and `exits the loop'.
10214
10215 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10216 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10217 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10218 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10219 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10220 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10221 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10222 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10223
10224 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10225 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10226 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10227 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10228 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10229 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10230 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10231 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10232 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10233 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10234 are repeatedly evaluated.
10235
10236 @node Loop Example
10237 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10238
10239 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10240 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10241 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10242 create a short example to illustrate it.
10243
10244 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10245 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10246 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10247 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10248 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10249 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10250 @code{while} loop.
10251
10252 @need 1200
10253 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10254 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10255
10256 @smallexample
10257 (setq empty-list ())
10258 @end smallexample
10259
10260 @noindent
10261 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10262 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10263 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10264 echo area:
10265
10266 @smallexample
10267 empty-list
10268 @end smallexample
10269
10270 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10271 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10272 evaluating the following two expressions:
10273
10274 @smallexample
10275 @group
10276 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10277
10278 animals
10279 @end group
10280 @end smallexample
10281
10282 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10283 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10284 written like this:
10285
10286 @smallexample
10287 @group
10288 (while animals
10289 @dots{}
10290 @end group
10291 @end smallexample
10292
10293 @noindent
10294 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10295 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10296 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10297 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10298 to be false.
10299
10300 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10301 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10302 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10303 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10304 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10305 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10306 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10307 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10308
10309 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10310 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10311 following expression:
10312
10313 @smallexample
10314 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10315 @end smallexample
10316
10317 @noindent
10318 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10319 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10320 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10321 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10322 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10323
10324 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10325 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10326 looks like this:
10327
10328 @smallexample
10329 @group
10330 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10331 @var{body}@dots{}
10332 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10333 @end group
10334 @end smallexample
10335
10336 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10337 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10338 own.
10339
10340 @node print-elements-of-list
10341 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10342 @findex print-elements-of-list
10343
10344 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10345 loop with a list.
10346
10347 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10348 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10349 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10350 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10351 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10352
10353 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10354 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10355 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10356 earlier versions.
10357
10358 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10359 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10360 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10361 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10362 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10363 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10364 (@code{yank}).
10365
10366 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10367 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10368 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10369 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10370 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10371 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10372 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10373 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10374 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10375
10376 @need 1500
10377 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10378 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10379 results.
10380
10381 @smallexample
10382 @group
10383 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10384
10385 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10386 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10387 (while list
10388 (print (car list))
10389 (setq list (cdr list))))
10390
10391 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10392 @end group
10393 @end smallexample
10394
10395 @need 1200
10396 @noindent
10397 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10398 this:
10399
10400 @smallexample
10401 @group
10402 gazelle
10403
10404 giraffe
10405
10406 lion
10407
10408 tiger
10409 nil
10410 @end group
10411 @end smallexample
10412
10413 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10414 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10415 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10416 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10417 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10418
10419 @node Incrementing Loop
10420 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10421
10422 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10423 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10424 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10425 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10426 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10427 repeats itself.
10428
10429 @ifnottex
10430 @node Incrementing Loop Details
10431 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10432 @end ifnottex
10433
10434 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10435 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10436 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10437 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10438 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10439 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10440 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10441 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10442 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10443 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10444
10445 @need 1250
10446 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10447 counter looks like this:
10448
10449 @smallexample
10450 @group
10451 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10452 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10453 @var{body}@dots{}
10454 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10455 @end group
10456 @end smallexample
10457
10458 @noindent
10459 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10460 is set to 1.
10461
10462 @menu
10463 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10464 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10465 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10466 @end menu
10467
10468 @node Incrementing Example
10469 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10470
10471 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10472 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10473 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10474
10475 @sp 1
10476 @c pebble diagram
10477 @ifnottex
10478 @smallexample
10479 @group
10480 *
10481 * *
10482 * * *
10483 * * * *
10484 @end group
10485 @end smallexample
10486 @end ifnottex
10487 @iftex
10488 @smallexample
10489 @group
10490 @bullet{}
10491 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10492 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10493 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10494 @end group
10495 @end smallexample
10496 @end iftex
10497 @sp 1
10498
10499 @noindent
10500 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10501 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10502
10503 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10504 triangle with 7 rows?
10505
10506 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10507 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10508 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10509 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10510 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10511 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10512 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10513
10514 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10515 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10516 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10517 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10518 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10519 a more complex process once.
10520
10521 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10522 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10523 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10524 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10525 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10526
10527 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10528 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10529 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10530 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10531 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10532 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10533 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10534
10535 @node Inc Example parts
10536 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10537
10538 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10539 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10540 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10541 the function.
10542
10543 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10544 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10545 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10546
10547 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10548 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10549 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10550 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10551
10552 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10553 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10554 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10555 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10556 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10557 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10558 more rows left to add.
10559
10560 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10561 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10562 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10563 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10564 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10565 statement will look like this:
10566
10567 @smallexample
10568 @group
10569 (let ((total 0)
10570 (row-number 1))
10571 @var{body}@dots{})
10572 @end group
10573 @end smallexample
10574
10575 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10576 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10577 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10578 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10579 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10580 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10581 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10582 equal to the number of rows.)
10583
10584 @need 1500
10585 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10586 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10587 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10588 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10589 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10590
10591 @smallexample
10592 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10593 @end smallexample
10594
10595 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10596 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10597 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10598 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10599 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10600 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10601 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10602
10603 @smallexample
10604 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10605 @end smallexample
10606
10607 @noindent
10608 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10609 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10610
10611 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10612 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10613 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10614 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10615 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10616 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10617 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10618 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10619 repetition of the loop.
10620
10621 @need 1200
10622 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10623 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10624
10625 @smallexample
10626 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10627 @end smallexample
10628
10629 @node Inc Example altogether
10630 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10631
10632 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10633 put them together.
10634
10635 @need 800
10636 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10637
10638 @smallexample
10639 @group
10640 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10641 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10642 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10643 @end group
10644 @end smallexample
10645
10646 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10647 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10648 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10649
10650 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10651 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10652 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10653 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10654 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10655
10656 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10657 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10658 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10659 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10660 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10661 of the @code{let}.
10662
10663 @need 1250
10664 In outline, the function will look like this:
10665
10666 @smallexample
10667 @group
10668 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10669 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10670 (let (@var{varlist})
10671 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10672 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10673 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10674 @end group
10675 @end smallexample
10676
10677 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10678 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10679 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10680 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10681 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10682 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10683 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10684 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10685 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10686 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10687
10688 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10689 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10690 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10691 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10692 the last element:
10693
10694 @smallexample
10695 @group
10696 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10697 @end group
10698 @end smallexample
10699
10700 @need 1200
10701 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10702 looks like this:
10703
10704 @smallexample
10705 @group
10706 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10707 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10708 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10709 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10710 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10711 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10712 @end group
10713 @group
10714 (let ((total 0)
10715 (row-number 1))
10716 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10717 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10718 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10719 total))
10720 @end group
10721 @end smallexample
10722
10723 @need 1200
10724 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10725 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10726
10727 @smallexample
10728 @group
10729 (triangle 4)
10730
10731 (triangle 7)
10732 @end group
10733 @end smallexample
10734
10735 @noindent
10736 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10737 numbers is 28.
10738
10739 @node Decrementing Loop
10740 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10741
10742 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10743 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10744 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10745 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10746 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10747 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
10748 repeatedly.
10749
10750 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
10751 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
10752 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
10753 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
10754 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
10755 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
10756 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
10757
10758 @need 1250
10759 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
10760
10761 @smallexample
10762 @group
10763 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10764 @var{body}@dots{}
10765 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
10766 @end group
10767 @end smallexample
10768
10769 @menu
10770 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
10771 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10772 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10773 @end menu
10774
10775 @node Decrementing Example
10776 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
10777
10778 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
10779 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
10780
10781 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
10782 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
10783 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
10784 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
10785 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
10786
10787 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
10788 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
10789 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
10790 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
10791 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
10792 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
10793 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
10794 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
10795
10796 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
10797 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
10798 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
10799 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
10800 the row.
10801
10802 @node Dec Example parts
10803 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10804
10805 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
10806 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
10807 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
10808 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
10809 @code{total}, respectively.
10810
10811 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
10812 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
10813 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
10814 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
10815 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
10816 the longest row.
10817
10818 @need 1250
10819 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
10820 like this:
10821
10822 @smallexample
10823 @group
10824 (let ((total 0)
10825 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10826 @var{body}@dots{})
10827 @end group
10828 @end smallexample
10829
10830 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10831 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
10832 evaluating the following expression:
10833
10834 @smallexample
10835 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10836 @end smallexample
10837
10838 @noindent
10839 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
10840 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
10841 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
10842 added to the total.
10843
10844 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
10845 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
10846 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
10847 done with the following expression:
10848
10849 @smallexample
10850 @group
10851 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10852 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10853 @end group
10854 @end smallexample
10855
10856 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
10857 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
10858 the @code{while} loop is simply:
10859
10860 @smallexample
10861 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10862 @end smallexample
10863
10864 @node Dec Example altogether
10865 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10866
10867 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
10868 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
10869 variables is unneeded!
10870
10871 @need 1250
10872 The function definition looks like this:
10873
10874 @smallexample
10875 @group
10876 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
10877 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
10878 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
10879 (let ((total 0)
10880 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10881 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10882 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10883 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10884 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
10885 total))
10886 @end group
10887 @end smallexample
10888
10889 As written, this function works.
10890
10891 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
10892
10893 @cindex Argument as local variable
10894 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
10895 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
10896 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
10897 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
10898 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
10899 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
10900 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
10901 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
10902
10903 @need 800
10904 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
10905
10906 @smallexample
10907 @group
10908 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
10909 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
10910 (let ((total 0))
10911 (while (> number 0)
10912 (setq total (+ total number))
10913 (setq number (1- number)))
10914 total))
10915 @end group
10916 @end smallexample
10917
10918 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
10919
10920 @enumerate
10921 @item
10922 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
10923 correct number of times.
10924
10925 @item
10926 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
10927 after being repeatedly evaluated.
10928
10929 @item
10930 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
10931 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
10932 number of times.
10933 @end enumerate
10934
10935 @node dolist dotimes
10936 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10937
10938 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10939 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
10940 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
10941 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
10942
10943 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
10944 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
10945 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
10946 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
10947
10948 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
10949
10950 @menu
10951 * dolist::
10952 * dotimes::
10953 @end menu
10954
10955 @node dolist
10956 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
10957 @findex dolist
10958
10959 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
10960 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
10961
10962 @need 1250
10963 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
10964
10965 @smallexample
10966 @group
10967 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10968
10969 (reverse animals)
10970 @end group
10971 @end smallexample
10972
10973 @need 800
10974 @noindent
10975 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
10976
10977 @smallexample
10978 @group
10979 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10980
10981 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
10982 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
10983 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
10984 (while list
10985 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
10986 (setq list (cdr list)))
10987 value))
10988
10989 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
10990 @end group
10991 @end smallexample
10992
10993 @need 800
10994 @noindent
10995 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
10996
10997 @smallexample
10998 @group
10999 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11000
11001 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11002 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11003 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11004 (dolist (element list value)
11005 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11006
11007 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11008 @end group
11009 @end smallexample
11010
11011 @need 1250
11012 @noindent
11013 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11014 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11015
11016 @smallexample
11017 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11018 @end smallexample
11019
11020 @noindent
11021 in the echo area.
11022
11023 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11024 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11025 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11026 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11027 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11028 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11029 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11030 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11031
11032 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11033 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11034 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11035 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11036 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11037 the loop.
11038
11039 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11040 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11041 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11042
11043 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11044 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops---it
11045 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own---and it automatically binds
11046 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11047 arguments.
11048
11049 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11050 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11051 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11052 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11053
11054 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11055 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11056 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11057 @code{value}.
11058
11059 @node dotimes
11060 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11061 @findex dotimes
11062
11063 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11064 loops a specific number of times.
11065
11066 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11067 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11068 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11069 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11070
11071 @need 1250
11072 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11073 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11074 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11075 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11076 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11077
11078 @smallexample
11079 @group
11080 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11081 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11082 (setq value (cons number value))))
11083
11084 @result{} (2 1 0)
11085 @end group
11086 @end smallexample
11087
11088 @noindent
11089 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11090 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11091 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11092
11093 @need 1250
11094 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11095 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11096
11097 @smallexample
11098 @group
11099 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11100 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11101 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11102 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11103 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11104
11105 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11106 @end group
11107 @end smallexample
11108
11109 @node Recursion
11110 @section Recursion
11111 @cindex Recursion
11112
11113 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11114 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11115 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11116 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11117 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11118 different `instance'.
11119
11120 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11121 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11122 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11123
11124 @menu
11125 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11126 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11127 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11128 * Recursive triangle function::
11129 * Recursion with cond::
11130 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11131 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11132 * No deferment solution::
11133 @end menu
11134
11135 @node Building Robots
11136 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11137 @cindex Building robots
11138 @cindex Robots, building
11139
11140 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11141 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11142 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11143 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11144 passed different arguments than the first.
11145
11146 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11147 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11148 entity; but all are clones.
11149
11150 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11151 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11152 when to stop.
11153
11154 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11155
11156 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11157 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11158 @code{defun} macro, you install the necessary equipment to build
11159 robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an assembly
11160 line. Robots with the same name are built according to the same
11161 blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number', but a
11162 different `serial number'.
11163
11164 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11165 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11166 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11167 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11168
11169 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11170 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11171
11172 @node Recursive Definition Parts
11173 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11174 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11175 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11176
11177 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11178 has three parts:
11179
11180 @enumerate
11181 @item
11182 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11183 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11184
11185 @item
11186 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11187 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11188
11189 @item
11190 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11191 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11192 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11193 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11194 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11195 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11196 @end enumerate
11197
11198 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11199 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11200 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11201 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11202 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11203
11204 @need 1200
11205 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11206 pattern looks like this:
11207
11208 @smallexample
11209 @group
11210 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11211 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11212 (if @var{do-again-test}
11213 @var{body}@dots{}
11214 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11215 @var{next-step-expression})))
11216 @end group
11217 @end smallexample
11218
11219 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11220 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11221
11222 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11223 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11224
11225 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11226
11227 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11228 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11229 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11230 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11231 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11232
11233 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11234 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11235
11236 @node Recursion with list
11237 @subsection Recursion with a List
11238
11239 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11240 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11241 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11242
11243 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11244 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11245 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11246 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11247 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11248 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11249 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11250
11251 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11252 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11253 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11254
11255 @findex print-elements-recursively
11256 @smallexample
11257 @group
11258 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11259
11260 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11261 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11262 Uses recursion."
11263 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11264 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11265 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11266 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11267
11268 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11269 @end group
11270 @end smallexample
11271
11272 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11273 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11274 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11275 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11276 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11277 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11278
11279 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11280 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11281 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11282 instance.
11283
11284 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11285 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11286 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11287
11288 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11289 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11290 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11291 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11292 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11293 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11294
11295 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11296 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11297 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11298 but is a separate individual.
11299
11300 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11301 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11302 works on a shorter list.
11303
11304 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11305 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11306 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11307 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11308 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11309
11310 @need 1200
11311 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11312 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11313
11314 @smallexample
11315 @group
11316 gazelle
11317
11318 giraffe
11319
11320 lion
11321
11322 tiger
11323 nil
11324 @end group
11325 @end smallexample
11326
11327 @need 2000
11328 @node Recursive triangle function
11329 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11330 @findex triangle-recursively
11331
11332 @need 1200
11333 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11334 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11335
11336 @smallexample
11337 @group
11338 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11339 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11340 Uses recursion."
11341 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11342 1 ; @r{then-part}
11343 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11344 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11345 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11346
11347 (triangle-recursively 7)
11348 @end group
11349 @end smallexample
11350
11351 @noindent
11352 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11353 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11354 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11355 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11356
11357 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11358 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11359 its argument.
11360
11361 @menu
11362 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11363 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11364 @end menu
11365
11366 @ifnottex
11367 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2
11368 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11369 @end ifnottex
11370
11371 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11372
11373 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11374 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11375 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11376 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11377 one row has one pebble in it.)
11378
11379 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11380 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11381
11382 @need 1200
11383 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11384 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11385 this:
11386
11387 @smallexample
11388 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11389 @end smallexample
11390
11391 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11392 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11393 in detail:
11394
11395 @table @i
11396 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11397
11398 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11399 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11400
11401 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11402
11403 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11404 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11405 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11406 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11407 function
11408
11409 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11410 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11411 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11412
11413 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11414
11415 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11416 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11417
11418 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11419
11420 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11421 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11422 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11423
11424 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11425 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11426 pebbles in it.
11427 @end table
11428
11429 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4
11430 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11431
11432 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11433 3.
11434
11435 @table @i
11436 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11437
11438 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11439 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11440 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11441 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11442 true.)
11443
11444 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11445
11446 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11447 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11448
11449 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11450
11451 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11452
11453 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11454 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11455 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11456
11457 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11458
11459 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11460 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11461 @end table
11462
11463 @noindent
11464 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11465
11466 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11467 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11468 called with an argument of 4:
11469
11470 @quotation
11471 @need 800
11472 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11473
11474 @smallexample
11475 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11476 @end smallexample
11477
11478 @need 800
11479 @noindent
11480 will return the value of evaluating
11481
11482 @smallexample
11483 (triangle-recursively 3)
11484 @end smallexample
11485
11486 @noindent
11487 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11488 third line.
11489 @end quotation
11490
11491 @noindent
11492 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11493
11494 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11495 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11496 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11497 evaluate itself.
11498
11499 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11500 requires that operations be deferred.
11501
11502 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11503 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11504 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11505 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11506 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11507 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11508 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11509 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11510
11511 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11512 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11513 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11514 on.
11515
11516 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11517 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11518
11519 @node Recursion with cond
11520 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11521 @findex cond
11522
11523 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11524 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11525 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11526 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11527
11528 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11529 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11530 explaining it.
11531
11532 @need 800
11533 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11534
11535 @smallexample
11536 @group
11537 (cond
11538 @var{body}@dots{})
11539 @end group
11540 @end smallexample
11541
11542 @noindent
11543 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11544
11545 @need 800
11546 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11547
11548 @smallexample
11549 @group
11550 (cond
11551 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11552 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11553 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11554 @dots{})
11555 @end group
11556 @end smallexample
11557
11558 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11559 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11560 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11561 @code{cond}.
11562
11563 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11564 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11565 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11566 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11567 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11568 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11569 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11570 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11571 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11572
11573 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11574 returns @code{nil}.
11575
11576 @need 1250
11577 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11578
11579 @smallexample
11580 @group
11581 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11582 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11583 ((= number 1) 1)
11584 ((> number 1)
11585 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11586 @end group
11587 @end smallexample
11588
11589 @noindent
11590 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11591 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11592 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11593 1.
11594
11595 @node Recursive Patterns
11596 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11597 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11598
11599 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11600 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11601 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11602
11603 @menu
11604 * Every::
11605 * Accumulate::
11606 * Keep::
11607 @end menu
11608
11609 @node Every
11610 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11611 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11612 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11613
11614 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11615 element of a list.
11616
11617 @need 1500
11618 The basic pattern is:
11619
11620 @itemize @bullet
11621 @item
11622 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11623 @item
11624 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11625 @itemize @minus
11626 @item
11627 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11628 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11629 @item
11630 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11631 with the results of acting on the rest.
11632 @end itemize
11633 @end itemize
11634
11635 @need 1500
11636 Here is example:
11637
11638 @smallexample
11639 @group
11640 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11641 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11642 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11643 nil
11644 (cons
11645 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11646 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11647 @end group
11648
11649 @group
11650 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11651 @result{} (1 4 9)
11652 @end group
11653 @end smallexample
11654
11655 @need 1200
11656 @noindent
11657 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11658 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11659 with the result of the recursive call.
11660
11661 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11662 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11663 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11664 empty.)
11665
11666 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11667 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11668 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11669 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11670
11671 @need 1250
11672 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11673
11674 @smallexample
11675 @group
11676 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11677 @end group
11678
11679 @group
11680 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11681 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11682 Uses recursion."
11683 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11684 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11685 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11686 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11687
11688 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11689 @end group
11690 @end smallexample
11691
11692 @need 1500
11693 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11694
11695 @itemize @bullet
11696 @item
11697 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11698 @item
11699 But when the list has at least one element,
11700 @itemize @minus
11701 @item
11702 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11703 @item
11704 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11705 @end itemize
11706 @end itemize
11707
11708 @node Accumulate
11709 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11710 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11711 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11712
11713 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11714 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11715 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11716 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11717
11718 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11719 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11720
11721 @need 1500
11722 The pattern is:
11723
11724 @itemize @bullet
11725 @item
11726 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11727 @item
11728 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11729 @itemize @minus
11730 @item
11731 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11732 some other combining function, with
11733 @item
11734 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11735 @end itemize
11736 @end itemize
11737
11738 @need 1500
11739 Here is an example:
11740
11741 @smallexample
11742 @group
11743 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
11744 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
11745 (if (not numbers-list)
11746 0
11747 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
11748 @end group
11749
11750 @group
11751 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
11752 @result{} 10
11753 @end group
11754 @end smallexample
11755
11756 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
11757 accumulate pattern.
11758
11759 @node Keep
11760 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
11761 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
11762 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
11763
11764 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
11765 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
11766 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
11767 meets a criterion.
11768
11769 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
11770 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
11771
11772 @need 1500
11773 The pattern has three parts:
11774
11775 @itemize @bullet
11776 @item
11777 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11778 @item
11779 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
11780 a test
11781 @itemize @minus
11782 @item
11783 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
11784 @item
11785 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11786 @end itemize
11787 @item
11788 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
11789 the test
11790 @itemize @minus
11791 @item
11792 skip on that element,
11793 @item
11794 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11795 @end itemize
11796 @end itemize
11797
11798 @need 1500
11799 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
11800
11801 @smallexample
11802 @group
11803 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
11804 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
11805 (cond
11806 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
11807 ((not word-list) nil)
11808
11809 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
11810 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
11811 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
11812 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
11813
11814 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
11815 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
11816 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
11817 @end group
11818
11819 @group
11820 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
11821 @result{} (one two six)
11822 @end group
11823 @end smallexample
11824
11825 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
11826 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
11827
11828 @node No Deferment
11829 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
11830 @cindex Deferment in recursion
11831 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
11832
11833 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
11834 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
11835 deferred until all can be done.
11836
11837 @need 800
11838 Here is the function definition:
11839
11840 @smallexample
11841 @group
11842 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11843 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11844 Uses recursion."
11845 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11846 1 ; @r{then-part}
11847 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11848 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11849 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11850 @end group
11851 @end smallexample
11852
11853 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
11854
11855 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
11856 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
11857 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
11858 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
11859
11860 @smallexample
11861 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
11862 @end smallexample
11863
11864 @noindent
11865 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
11866 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
11867 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
11868 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
11869 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
11870 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
11871 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
11872 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
11873
11874 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
11875 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
11876 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
11877 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
11878
11879 @need 800
11880 Now the total is:
11881
11882 @smallexample
11883 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
11884 @end smallexample
11885
11886 @need 800
11887 And what happens next?
11888
11889 @smallexample
11890 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
11891 @end smallexample
11892
11893 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
11894 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
11895 asks it to make a calculation.
11896
11897 @need 800
11898 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
11899
11900 @smallexample
11901 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
11902 @end smallexample
11903
11904 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
11905 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
11906 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
11907 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
11908 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
11909 more steps.
11910
11911 @node No deferment solution
11912 @subsection No Deferment Solution
11913 @cindex No deferment solution
11914 @cindex Defermentless solution
11915 @cindex Solution without deferment
11916
11917 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
11918 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
11919 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
11920 `constant space'.}. This requires
11921 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
11922 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
11923 function.
11924
11925 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
11926 does the work.
11927
11928 @need 1200
11929 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
11930 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
11931
11932 @smallexample
11933 @group
11934 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
11935 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11936 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
11937 duo that uses recursion."
11938 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
11939 @end group
11940 @end smallexample
11941
11942 @smallexample
11943 @group
11944 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
11945 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
11946 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
11947 that uses recursion."
11948 (if (> counter number)
11949 sum
11950 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
11951 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
11952 number))) ; @r{number}
11953 @end group
11954 @end smallexample
11955
11956 @need 1250
11957 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
11958 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
11959
11960 @smallexample
11961 @group
11962 (triangle-initialization 2)
11963 @result{} 3
11964 @end group
11965 @end smallexample
11966
11967 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
11968 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
11969 number of rows in the triangle.
11970
11971 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
11972 initialization values. These values are changed when
11973 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
11974 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
11975 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
11976 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
11977 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
11978 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
11979 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
11980 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
11981 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
11982
11983 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
11984 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
11985
11986 @need 1200
11987 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
11988 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
11989 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
11990
11991 @smallexample
11992 (> 0 1)
11993 @end smallexample
11994
11995 @need 1200
11996 @noindent
11997 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
11998 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
11999
12000 @smallexample
12001 @group
12002 (triangle-recursive-helper
12003 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12004 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12005 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12006 @end group
12007 @end smallexample
12008
12009 @need 800
12010 @noindent
12011 which will first compute:
12012
12013 @smallexample
12014 @group
12015 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12016 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12017 1) ; @r{number}
12018 @exdent which is:
12019
12020 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12021 @end group
12022 @end smallexample
12023
12024 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12025 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12026 new instance with new arguments.
12027
12028 @need 800
12029 This new instance will be;
12030
12031 @smallexample
12032 @group
12033 (triangle-recursive-helper
12034 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12035 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12036 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12037
12038 @exdent which is:
12039
12040 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12041 @end group
12042 @end smallexample
12043
12044 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12045 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12046 expected.
12047
12048 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12049 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12050
12051 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12052
12053 @need 800
12054 In stages, the instances called will be:
12055
12056 @smallexample
12057 @group
12058 @r{sum counter number}
12059 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12060
12061 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12062
12063 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12064 @end group
12065 @end smallexample
12066
12067 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12068 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12069 which will be 3.
12070
12071 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12072 many resources in a computer.
12073
12074 @need 1500
12075 @node Looping exercise
12076 @section Looping Exercise
12077
12078 @itemize @bullet
12079 @item
12080 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12081 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12082
12083 @item
12084 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12085 adds the values.
12086
12087 @item
12088 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12089 using @code{cond}.
12090
12091 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12092 @item
12093 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12094 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12095 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12096 written in Texinfo.)
12097
12098 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12099 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12100 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12101 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12102 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12103 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12104 backwards.
12105
12106 For more information, see
12107 @ifinfo
12108 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12109 @end ifinfo
12110 @ifhtml
12111 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12112 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12113 Internet, see
12114 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12115 @end ifhtml
12116 @iftex
12117 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12118 Documentation Format}.
12119 @end iftex
12120 @end itemize
12121
12122 @node Regexp Search
12123 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12124 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12125 @cindex Regular expression searches
12126 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12127 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12128 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12129 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12130
12131 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12132 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12133 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12134 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12135 as `regexp'.
12136
12137 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12138 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12139 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12140 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12141 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12142 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12143 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12144 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12145 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12146 that spot.
12147
12148 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12149 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12150 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12151 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12152 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12153 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12154 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12155 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12156 introduces several new features.
12157
12158 @menu
12159 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12160 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12161 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12162 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12163 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12164 * Regexp Review::
12165 * re-search Exercises::
12166 @end menu
12167
12168 @node sentence-end
12169 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12170 @findex sentence-end
12171
12172 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12173 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12174
12175 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12176 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12177 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12178 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12179
12180 @smallexample
12181 [.?!]
12182 @end smallexample
12183
12184 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12185 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12186 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12187 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12188
12189 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12190 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12191 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12192 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12193 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12194 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12195 items as alternatives.
12196
12197 @need 800
12198 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12199
12200 @smallexample
12201 @group
12202 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12203 ^ ^^
12204 TAB SPC
12205 @end group
12206 @end smallexample
12207
12208 @noindent
12209 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12210 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12211 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12212
12213 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12214 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12215 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12216 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12217
12218 @need 1000
12219 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12220 this:
12221
12222 @smallexample
12223 @group
12224 [
12225 ]*
12226 @end group
12227 @end smallexample
12228
12229 @noindent
12230 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12231 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12232 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12233
12234 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12235 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12236 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12237 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12238 expression that looks like this:
12239
12240 @smallexample
12241 []\"')@}]*
12242 @end smallexample
12243
12244 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12245 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12246 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12247 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12248
12249 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12250 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12251 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12252
12253 @smallexample
12254 @group
12255 sentence-end
12256 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12257 ]*"
12258 @end group
12259 @end smallexample
12260
12261 @noindent
12262 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12263 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12264 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12265 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12266 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12267 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12268 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12269 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12270 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12271 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12272 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12273 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12274 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12275
12276 @ignore
12277 @noindent
12278 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12279 literally in the pattern.)
12280
12281 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12282
12283 @table @code
12284 @item [.?!]
12285 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12286 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12287 begin with one or other of these characters.
12288
12289 @item []\"')@}]*
12290 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12291 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12292 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12293 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12294 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12295 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12296 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12297 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12298 more times.
12299
12300 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12301 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12302 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12303 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12304 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12305 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12306 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12307 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12308 indicate what they are.
12309
12310 @item [@key{RET}]*
12311 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12312 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12313 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12314 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12315 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12316 @end table
12317 @end ignore
12318
12319 @node re-search-forward
12320 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12321 @findex re-search-forward
12322
12323 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12324 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12325 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12326
12327 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12328 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12329 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12330 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12331 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12332 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12333
12334 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12335 four arguments:
12336
12337 @enumerate
12338 @item
12339 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12340 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12341
12342 @item
12343 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12344 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12345
12346 @item
12347 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12348 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12349 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12350 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12351 if the search succeeds.
12352
12353 @item
12354 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12355 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12356 @end enumerate
12357
12358 @need 800
12359 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12360
12361 @smallexample
12362 @group
12363 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12364 @var{limit-of-search}
12365 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12366 @var{repeat-count})
12367 @end group
12368 @end smallexample
12369
12370 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12371 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12372 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12373 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12374 to.
12375
12376 @need 1200
12377 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12378 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12379
12380 @smallexample
12381 @group
12382 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12383 ]*"
12384 @end group
12385 @end smallexample
12386
12387 @noindent
12388 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12389 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12390 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12391 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12392
12393 @node forward-sentence
12394 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12395 @findex forward-sentence
12396
12397 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12398 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12399 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12400 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12401 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12402 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12403
12404 @menu
12405 * Complete forward-sentence::
12406 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12407 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12408 @end menu
12409
12410 @ifnottex
12411 @node Complete forward-sentence
12412 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12413 @end ifnottex
12414
12415 @need 1250
12416 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12417
12418 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12419 @smallexample
12420 @group
12421 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12422 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12423 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12424
12425 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12426 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12427 @end group
12428 @group
12429 (interactive "p")
12430 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12431 (let ((opoint (point))
12432 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12433 (while (< arg 0)
12434 (let ((pos (point))
12435 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12436 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12437 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12438 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12439 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12440 (goto-char par-beg)))
12441 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12442 @end group
12443 @group
12444 (while (> arg 0)
12445 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12446 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12447 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12448 (goto-char par-end)))
12449 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12450 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12451 @end group
12452 @end smallexample
12453
12454 @ignore
12455 GNU Emacs 21
12456 @smallexample
12457 @group
12458 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12459 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12460 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12461 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12462 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12463 terminates sentences as well."
12464 @end group
12465 @group
12466 (interactive "p")
12467 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12468 (while (< arg 0)
12469 (let ((par-beg
12470 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12471 (if (re-search-backward
12472 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12473 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12474 (goto-char par-beg)))
12475 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12476 (while (> arg 0)
12477 (let ((par-end
12478 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12479 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12480 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12481 (goto-char par-end)))
12482 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12483 @end group
12484 @end smallexample
12485 @end ignore
12486
12487 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12488 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12489 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12490
12491 @smallexample
12492 @group
12493 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12494 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12495 (interactive "p")
12496 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12497 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12498 (while (< arg 0)
12499 (let ((pos (point))
12500 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12501 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12502 (while (> arg 0)
12503 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12504 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12505 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12506 @end group
12507 @end smallexample
12508
12509 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12510 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12511 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12512
12513 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12514
12515 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12516
12517 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12518 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12519 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12520 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12521 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12522
12523 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12524 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12525 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12526 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12527 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12528 @code{nil}.
12529
12530 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12531 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12532 point, from before the search, is used in the
12533 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12534 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12535 @code{sentence-end} function.
12536
12537 @node fwd-sentence while loops
12538 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12539
12540 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12541 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12542 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12543 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12544 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12545 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12546 loop.
12547
12548 @need 1500
12549 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12550 looks like this:
12551
12552 @smallexample
12553 @group
12554 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12555 (let @var{varlist}
12556 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12557 @var{then-part}
12558 @var{else-part}
12559 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12560 @end group
12561 @end smallexample
12562
12563 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12564 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12565 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12566 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12567 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12568 the loop repeats.
12569
12570 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12571 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12572 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12573
12574 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12575 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12576 @code{if} expression.
12577
12578 @need 1250
12579 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12580
12581 @smallexample
12582 @group
12583 (let ((par-end
12584 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12585 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12586 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12587 (goto-char par-end)))
12588 @end group
12589 @end smallexample
12590
12591 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12592 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12593 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12594 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12595 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12596
12597 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12598 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12599 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12600 evaluates the expression
12601
12602 @smallexample
12603 @group
12604 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12605 @end group
12606 @end smallexample
12607
12608 @noindent
12609 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12610 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12611 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12612 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12613 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12614 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12615 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12616
12617 @need 1200
12618 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12619 expression that looks like this:
12620
12621 @smallexample
12622 @group
12623 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12624 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12625 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12626 @end group
12627 @end smallexample
12628
12629 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12630 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12631 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12632 expression is the regular expression search.
12633
12634 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12635 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12636 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12637
12638 @node fwd-sentence re-search
12639 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12640
12641 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12642 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12643 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12644 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12645
12646 @enumerate
12647 @item
12648 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12649 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12650
12651 @item
12652 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12653 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12654 successful.
12655 @end enumerate
12656
12657 @noindent
12658 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12659 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12660 conclusion of the search.
12661
12662 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12663 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12664 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12665 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12666 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12667 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12668 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12669 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12670 usually a period.
12671
12672 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12673 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12674 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12675 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12676 end of the paragraph.
12677
12678 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12679 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12680
12681 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12682 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12683 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12684 incorporating this pattern often.
12685
12686 @node forward-paragraph
12687 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12688 @findex forward-paragraph
12689
12690 @ignore
12691 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12692 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12693 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12694 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12695 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12696
12697 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12698 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12699 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12700 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12701 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12702 (interactive "p")
12703 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12704 (let* ((opoint (point))
12705 (fill-prefix-regexp
12706 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12707 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12708 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12709 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12710 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12711 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12712 ;; work normally with indented text.
12713 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12714 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12715 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12716 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12717 paragraph-start))
12718 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12719 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12720 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12721 paragraph-separate))
12722 (parsep
12723 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12724 (concat parsep "\\|"
12725 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12726 parsep))
12727 ;; This is used for searching.
12728 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12729 start found-start)
12730 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
12731 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
12732 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
12733 (looking-at parsep))
12734 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12735 (setq start (point))
12736 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
12737 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
12738 (while (and (not (bobp))
12739 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12740 (looking-at parsep)))
12741 (forward-line -1))
12742 (if (bobp)
12743 nil
12744 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12745 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
12746 (end-of-line)
12747 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
12748 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
12749 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12750 (let (multiple-lines)
12751 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
12752 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12753 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12754 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12755 (unless (= (point) start)
12756 (setq multiple-lines t))
12757 (forward-line -1))
12758 (move-to-left-margin)
12759 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
12760 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
12761 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
12762 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
12763 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
12764 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12765 ;; multiple-lines
12766 ;; (forward-line 1))
12767 (not (bobp)))
12768 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
12769 (setq found-start t)
12770 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
12771 ;; REAL parstart.
12772 (progn (setq start (point))
12773 (move-to-left-margin)
12774 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12775 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
12776 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
12777 (bobp)
12778 (get-text-property
12779 (1- start) 'hard)))))
12780 (setq found-start nil)
12781 (goto-char start))
12782 found-start)
12783 ;; Found one.
12784 (progn
12785 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
12786 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
12787 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
12788 (while (and (not (eobp))
12789 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12790 (looking-at parsep)))
12791 (forward-line 1))
12792 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
12793 (end-of-line 0)
12794 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
12795 (forward-char 1)
12796 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
12797 (if (not (bolp))
12798 (forward-line 1))))
12799 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
12800 (goto-char (point-min))))))
12801
12802 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
12803 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
12804 (while (and (not (eobp))
12805 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12806 (looking-at parsep))
12807 (forward-line 1))
12808 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
12809 ;; ... and one more line.
12810 (forward-line 1)
12811 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12812 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12813 (while (and (not (eobp))
12814 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12815 (not (looking-at parsep))
12816 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12817 (forward-line 1))
12818 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
12819 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
12820 (goto-char start)
12821 (not (eobp)))
12822 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12823 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12824 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
12825 (and use-hard-newlines
12826 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
12827 (forward-char 1))
12828 (if (< (point) (point-max))
12829 (goto-char start))))
12830 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
12831 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
12832 arg))
12833 @end ignore
12834
12835 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
12836 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
12837 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
12838 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
12839
12840 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
12841 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
12842 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
12843 fill prefix.
12844
12845 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
12846 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
12847 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
12848 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
12849 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
12850 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
12851 prefixes.)
12852
12853 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
12854 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
12855 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
12856 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
12857 with the fill prefix.
12858
12859 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
12860 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
12861 This is an added complication.
12862
12863 @menu
12864 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
12865 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
12866 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
12867 @end menu
12868
12869 @ifnottex
12870 @node forward-paragraph in brief
12871 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
12872 @end ifnottex
12873
12874 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
12875 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
12876 can be daunting!
12877
12878 @need 800
12879 In outline, the function looks like this:
12880
12881 @smallexample
12882 @group
12883 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12884 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12885 (interactive "p")
12886 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12887 (let*
12888 @var{varlist}
12889 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
12890 @dots{}
12891 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
12892 @dots{}
12893 @end group
12894 @end smallexample
12895
12896 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
12897 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
12898
12899 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
12900 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
12901 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
12902 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
12903 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
12904 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
12905 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
12906 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
12907 familiar part of this function.
12908
12909 @node fwd-para let
12910 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
12911
12912 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
12913 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
12914 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
12915
12916 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
12917 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
12918 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
12919 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
12920
12921 @ignore
12922 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
12923 @end ignore
12924
12925 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
12926
12927 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
12928 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12929 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
12930 @code{found-start}.
12931
12932 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
12933 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
12934
12935 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
12936 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
12937 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
12938
12939 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
12940 evaluating the following list:
12941
12942 @smallexample
12943 @group
12944 (and fill-prefix
12945 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12946 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12947 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
12948 @end group
12949 @end smallexample
12950
12951 @noindent
12952 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
12953
12954 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
12955 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
12956 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
12957 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
12958 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
12959 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
12960 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
12961 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
12962 arguments are true.
12963 @findex and
12964
12965 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
12966 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
12967 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
12968 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
12969
12970 @table @code
12971 @item fill-prefix
12972 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
12973 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
12974 @code{nil}.
12975
12976 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
12977 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
12978 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
12979 not a useful fill prefix.
12980
12981 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12982 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
12983 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
12984 true value such as @code{t}.
12985
12986 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
12987 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
12988 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
12989 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
12990 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12991 @end table
12992
12993 @findex regexp-quote
12994 @noindent
12995 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
12996 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
12997 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
12998 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
12999 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13000 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13001 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13002 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13003
13004 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13005 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13006 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13007 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13008 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13009
13010 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13011 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13012 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13013 @code{nil} or some other value.
13014
13015 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13016 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13017 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13018 what separates paragraphs.)
13019
13020 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13021 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13022 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13023 of the pattern.
13024
13025 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13026 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13027 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13028 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13029 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13030 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13031
13032 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13033 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13034 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13035
13036 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13037 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13038 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13039 section.
13040
13041 @node fwd-para while
13042 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13043
13044 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13045 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13046 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13047 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13048 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13049 forward one paragraph.
13050
13051 @ignore
13052 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13053
13054 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13055 (while (and (not (eobp))
13056 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13057 (looking-at parsep))
13058 (forward-line 1))
13059 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13060 ;; ... and one more line.
13061 (forward-line 1)
13062
13063 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13064 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13065 (while (and (not (eobp))
13066 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13067 (not (looking-at parsep))
13068 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13069 (forward-line 1))
13070
13071 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13072 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13073 (goto-char start)
13074 (not (eobp)))
13075 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13076 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13077 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13078 (and use-hard-newlines
13079 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13080 (forward-char 1))
13081
13082 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13083 (goto-char start))))
13084 @end ignore
13085
13086 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13087 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13088
13089 @need 800
13090 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13091
13092 @smallexample
13093 @group
13094 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13095 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13096
13097 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13098 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13099 (while (and (not (eobp))
13100 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13101 (looking-at parsep))
13102 (forward-line 1))
13103 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13104 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13105 ;; ... and one more line.
13106 (forward-line 1)
13107 @end group
13108
13109 @group
13110 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13111 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13112 ;; we go forward line by line
13113 (while (and (not (eobp))
13114 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13115 (not (looking-at parsep))
13116 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13117 (forward-line 1))
13118 @end group
13119
13120 @group
13121 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13122 ;; we go forward character by character
13123 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13124 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13125 (goto-char start)
13126 (not (eobp)))
13127 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13128 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13129 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13130 (and use-hard-newlines
13131 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13132 (forward-char 1))
13133 @end group
13134
13135 @group
13136 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13137 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13138 ;; for sp-parstart
13139 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13140 (goto-char start))))
13141 @end group
13142 @end smallexample
13143
13144 @findex eobp
13145 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13146 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13147 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13148 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13149 of the buffer---that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13150 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P}---we decrease the value
13151 of @code{arg} by one.
13152
13153 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13154 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13155 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13156 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13157 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13158
13159 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13160 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13161 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13162
13163 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13164 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13165 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13166 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13167 margin of the current line.
13168
13169 @findex looking-at
13170 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13171 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13172 its argument.
13173
13174 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13175 sense as you come to understand it.
13176
13177 @need 800
13178 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13179
13180 @smallexample
13181 @group
13182 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13183 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13184 ;; we go forward line by line
13185 (while (and (not (eobp))
13186 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13187 (not (looking-at parsep))
13188 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13189 (forward-line 1))
13190 @end group
13191 @end smallexample
13192
13193 @noindent
13194 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13195 as four conditions are true:
13196
13197 @enumerate
13198 @item
13199 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13200
13201 @item
13202 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13203 not at the end of the buffer.
13204
13205 @item
13206 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13207
13208 @item
13209 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13210 @end enumerate
13211
13212 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13213 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13214 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13215 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13216
13217 @need 1250
13218 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13219
13220 @smallexample
13221 @group
13222 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13223 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13224 (goto-char start)
13225 (not (eobp)))
13226 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13227 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13228 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13229 (and use-hard-newlines
13230 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13231 (forward-char 1))
13232 @end group
13233 @end smallexample
13234
13235 @noindent
13236 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13237 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13238 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13239 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13240 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13241 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13242
13243 @need 800
13244 The two expressions,
13245
13246 @smallexample
13247 @group
13248 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13249 (goto-char start)
13250 @end group
13251 @end smallexample
13252
13253 @noindent
13254 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13255 search.
13256
13257 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13258 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13259 the last search.
13260
13261 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13262 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13263 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13264 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13265 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13266 @code{sp-parstart}.
13267
13268 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13269 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13270 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13271 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13272
13273 @findex match-beginning
13274 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13275 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13276 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13277 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13278 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13279 of that pattern.
13280
13281 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13282 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13283 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13284 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13285 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13286
13287 @need 1250
13288 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13289
13290 @smallexample
13291 @group
13292 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13293 (goto-char start))))
13294 @end group
13295 @end smallexample
13296
13297 @noindent
13298 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13299 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13300 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13301
13302 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13303 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13304
13305 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13306 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13307 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13308 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13309 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13310 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13311 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13312 a car with his eyes shut!)
13313
13314 @node etags
13315 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13316 @findex etags
13317 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13318
13319 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13320 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13321 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13322 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13323 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13324 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13325
13326 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13327 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13328 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13329 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13330 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13331 sources.)
13332
13333 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13334 lack one.
13335
13336 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13337 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13338 the name is in upper case letters.
13339
13340 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13341 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13342 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13343 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13344
13345 @need 1250
13346 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13347 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13348 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13349 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13350 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13351
13352 @smallexample
13353 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13354 @end smallexample
13355
13356 @noindent
13357 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13358
13359 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13360 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13361 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13362 Lisp files in that directory.
13363
13364 @need 1250
13365 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13366 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13367 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13368 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13369
13370 @smallexample
13371 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13372 @end smallexample
13373
13374 @need 1250
13375 Type
13376
13377 @smallexample
13378 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13379 @end smallexample
13380
13381 @noindent
13382 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13383 list of supported languages.
13384
13385 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13386 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13387 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13388 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13389 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13390 file name and contents.
13391
13392 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13393 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13394 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13395 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13396
13397 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13398 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13399 program to attempt to find it.
13400
13401 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13402 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13403 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13404 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13405 @file{TAGS} files.
13406
13407 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13408 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13409 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13410 visit-tags-table}.
13411
13412 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13413 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13414 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13415 @findex make tags
13416
13417 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13418 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13419 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13420 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13421 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13422
13423 @need 1250
13424 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13425 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13426
13427 @smallexample
13428 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13429 @end smallexample
13430
13431 @noindent
13432 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13433 as well as with some other source packages.)
13434
13435 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13436 Manual}.
13437
13438 @node Regexp Review
13439 @section Review
13440
13441 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13442
13443 @table @code
13444 @item while
13445 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13446 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13447 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13448
13449 @need 1250
13450 For example:
13451
13452 @smallexample
13453 @group
13454 (let ((foo 2))
13455 (while (> foo 0)
13456 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13457 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13458
13459 @result{} foo is 2.
13460 foo is 1.
13461 nil
13462 @end group
13463 @end smallexample
13464
13465 @noindent
13466 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13467 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13468 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13469 line.)
13470
13471 @item re-search-forward
13472 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13473 just after it.
13474
13475 @noindent
13476 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13477
13478 @enumerate
13479 @item
13480 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13481 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13482
13483 @item
13484 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13485
13486 @item
13487 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13488 error message.
13489
13490 @item
13491 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13492 search goes backwards.
13493 @end enumerate
13494
13495 @item let*
13496 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13497 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13498 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13499 variables bound earlier, if any.
13500
13501 @need 1250
13502 For example:
13503
13504 @smallexample
13505 @group
13506 (let* ((foo 7)
13507 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13508 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13509 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13510 @end group
13511 @end smallexample
13512
13513 @item match-beginning
13514 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13515 expression search.
13516
13517 @item looking-at
13518 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13519 which should be a regular expression.
13520
13521 @item eobp
13522 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13523 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13524 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13525 the buffer is narrowed.
13526 @end table
13527
13528 @need 1500
13529 @node re-search Exercises
13530 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13531
13532 @itemize @bullet
13533 @item
13534 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13535 or more blank lines in sequence.
13536
13537 @item
13538 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13539 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13540 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13541 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13542 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13543 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13544 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13545 @end itemize
13546
13547 @node Counting Words
13548 @chapter Counting via Repetition and Regexps
13549 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13550 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13551
13552 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13553 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13554 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13555 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13556
13557 @menu
13558 * Why Count Words::
13559 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13560 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13561 * Counting Exercise::
13562 @end menu
13563
13564 @ifnottex
13565 @node Why Count Words
13566 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13567 @end ifnottex
13568
13569 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13570 number of lines and words within a region.
13571
13572 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13573 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13574 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13575 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13576 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13577 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13578 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13579 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13580 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13581
13582 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13583 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13584 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13585
13586 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13587 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13588 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13589
13590 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13591 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13592 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13593 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13594 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13595 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13596 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13597 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13598 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13599
13600 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13601 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13602 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13603 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13604 or to a @code{while} loop.
13605
13606 @menu
13607 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13608 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13609 @end menu
13610
13611 @ifnottex
13612 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13613 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13614 @end ifnottex
13615
13616 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13617 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13618 interactive.
13619
13620 @need 800
13621 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13622
13623 @smallexample
13624 @group
13625 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13626 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13627 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13628 @var{body}@dots{})
13629 @end group
13630 @end smallexample
13631
13632 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13633
13634 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13635 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13636 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13637 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13638 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13639
13640 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13641 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13642 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13643 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13644 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13645 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13646 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13647 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13648 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13649 this is routine.
13650
13651 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13652 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13653 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13654 a message to the user.
13655
13656 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13657 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13658 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13659 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13660 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13661 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13662 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13663 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13664
13665 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13666 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13667 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13668 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13669 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13670
13671 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13672 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13673 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13674
13675 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13676 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13677 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13678 word by word.
13679
13680 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13681 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13682 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13683 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13684 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13685 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13686 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13687 the regexp must be optional.)
13688
13689 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13690 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13691 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13692 this is:
13693
13694 @smallexample
13695 \w+\W*
13696 @end smallexample
13697
13698 @noindent
13699 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13700 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13701 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13702 Reference Manual}.
13703
13704 @need 800
13705 The search expression looks like this:
13706
13707 @smallexample
13708 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13709 @end smallexample
13710
13711 @noindent
13712 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13713 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13714 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13715 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13716 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13717 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13718 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13719 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13720
13721 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13722 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13723 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13724
13725 @smallexample
13726 (setq count (1+ count))
13727 @end smallexample
13728
13729 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13730 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
13731 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
13732 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
13733 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
13734 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
13735 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
13736 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
13737 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
13738 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
13739 special form is appropriate.
13740
13741 @need 1500
13742 All this leads to the following function definition:
13743
13744 @smallexample
13745 @group
13746 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13747 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13748 "Print number of words in the region.
13749 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
13750 character followed by at least one character that
13751 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
13752 table determines which characters these are."
13753 (interactive "r")
13754 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13755 @end group
13756
13757 @group
13758 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13759 (save-excursion
13760 (goto-char beginning)
13761 (let ((count 0))
13762 @end group
13763
13764 @group
13765 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13766 (while (< (point) end)
13767 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13768 (setq count (1+ count)))
13769 @end group
13770
13771 @group
13772 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13773 (cond ((zerop count)
13774 (message
13775 "The region does NOT have any words."))
13776 ((= 1 count)
13777 (message
13778 "The region has 1 word."))
13779 (t
13780 (message
13781 "The region has %d words." count))))))
13782 @end group
13783 @end smallexample
13784
13785 @noindent
13786 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
13787
13788 @node Whitespace Bug
13789 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13790
13791 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
13792 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
13793 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
13794 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
13795 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
13796 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
13797 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
13798 like this:
13799
13800 @smallexample
13801 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
13802 @end smallexample
13803
13804 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
13805 bugs yourself.
13806
13807 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
13808 @ifinfo
13809 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
13810 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
13811
13812 @smallexample
13813 @group
13814 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13815 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13816 "Print number of words in the region.
13817 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
13818 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
13819 syntax table determines which characters these are."
13820 @end group
13821 @group
13822 (interactive "r")
13823 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13824 @end group
13825
13826 @group
13827 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13828 (save-excursion
13829 (goto-char beginning)
13830 (let ((count 0))
13831 @end group
13832
13833 @group
13834 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13835 (while (< (point) end)
13836 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13837 (setq count (1+ count)))
13838 @end group
13839
13840 @group
13841 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13842 (cond ((zerop count)
13843 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
13844 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
13845 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
13846 @end group
13847 @end smallexample
13848 @end ifinfo
13849
13850 @need 1000
13851 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
13852
13853 @smallexample
13854 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
13855 @end smallexample
13856
13857 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
13858 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
13859 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
13860
13861 @smallexample
13862 one two three
13863 @end smallexample
13864
13865 @noindent
13866 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
13867
13868 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
13869 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
13870 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
13871 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
13872 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
13873 that the region has one word!
13874
13875 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
13876 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
13877 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
13878 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
13879 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
13880 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
13881 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
13882 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
13883
13884 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
13885
13886 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
13887 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
13888 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13889 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
13890 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
13891 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
13892 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
13893 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
13894 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
13895 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
13896 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
13897 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
13898 the marked region.
13899
13900 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
13901 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
13902 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
13903 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
13904 in the buffer, the search fails.
13905
13906 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
13907 extend outside of the region.
13908
13909 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
13910 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
13911 simple as you might think.
13912
13913 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
13914 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
13915 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
13916 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
13917 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
13918 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
13919 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
13920 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
13921
13922 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
13923 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
13924 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
13925 to the regular expression search expression:
13926
13927 @smallexample
13928 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
13929 @end smallexample
13930
13931 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13932 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
13933 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
13934 @samp{Search failed}.
13935
13936 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
13937 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13938 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
13939 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
13940 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
13941
13942 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
13943 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
13944 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
13945
13946 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
13947 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
13948 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
13949
13950 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
13951 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13952 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
13953 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
13954 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
13955 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
13956 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
13957 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
13958 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
13959 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
13960 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
13961
13962 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
13963 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
13964 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
13965 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
13966 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
13967 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
13968
13969 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
13970 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
13971 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
13972 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
13973
13974 @smallexample
13975 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
13976 @end smallexample
13977
13978 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
13979 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
13980 @iftex
13981 @noindent
13982 (For information about @code{and}, see
13983 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
13984 @end iftex
13985 @ifinfo
13986 @noindent
13987 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
13988 information about @code{and}.)
13989 @end ifinfo
13990
13991 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
13992 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
13993 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
13994 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
13995 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
13996 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
13997 other of its messages.
13998
13999 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14000 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14001 Here is what it looks like:
14002
14003 @smallexample
14004 @group
14005 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14006 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14007 "Print number of words in the region."
14008 (interactive "r")
14009 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14010 @end group
14011
14012 @group
14013 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14014 (save-excursion
14015 (let ((count 0))
14016 (goto-char beginning)
14017 @end group
14018
14019 @group
14020 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14021 (while (and (< (point) end)
14022 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14023 (setq count (1+ count)))
14024 @end group
14025
14026 @group
14027 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14028 (cond ((zerop count)
14029 (message
14030 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14031 ((= 1 count)
14032 (message
14033 "The region has 1 word."))
14034 (t
14035 (message
14036 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14037 @end group
14038 @end smallexample
14039
14040 @node recursive-count-words
14041 @section Count Words Recursively
14042 @cindex Count words recursively
14043 @cindex Recursively counting words
14044 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14045
14046 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14047 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14048
14049 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14050 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14051 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14052 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14053
14054 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14055 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14056 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14057 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14058 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14059 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14060 message; the other will return the word count.
14061
14062 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14063 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14064
14065 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14066 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14067 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14068 determine how many words are in the region.
14069
14070 @need 1250
14071 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14072 previous versions:
14073
14074 @smallexample
14075 @group
14076 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14077 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14078 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14079 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14080 @end group
14081 @group
14082
14083 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14084 (@var{explanatory message})
14085 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14086 @end group
14087 @group
14088
14089 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14090 @var{recursive call}
14091 @end group
14092 @group
14093
14094 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14095 @var{message providing word count}))
14096 @end group
14097 @end smallexample
14098
14099 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14100 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14101 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14102 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14103 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14104 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14105 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14106 user.
14107
14108 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14109 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14110 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14111 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14112
14113 @need 1250
14114 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14115
14116 @smallexample
14117 @group
14118 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14119 "Print number of words in the region."
14120 (interactive "r")
14121 @end group
14122
14123 @group
14124 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14125 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14126 (save-excursion
14127 (goto-char beginning)
14128 @end group
14129
14130 @group
14131 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14132 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14133 @end group
14134
14135 @group
14136 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14137 (cond ((zerop count)
14138 (message
14139 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14140 ((= 1 count)
14141 (message
14142 "The region has 1 word."))
14143 (t
14144 (message
14145 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14146 @end group
14147 @end smallexample
14148
14149 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14150
14151 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14152 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14153
14154 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14155 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14156 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14157 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14158 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14159 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14160 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14161 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14162 argument.
14163
14164 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14165 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14166
14167 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14168 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14169 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14170 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14171 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14172 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14173
14174 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14175
14176 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14177 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14178
14179 @need 1250
14180 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14181
14182 @smallexample
14183 @group
14184 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14185 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14186 @var{do-again-test}
14187 @var{next-step-expression}
14188 @var{recursive call})
14189 @end group
14190 @end smallexample
14191
14192 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14193 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14194 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14195 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14196 function should return zero.
14197
14198 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14199 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14200
14201 @need 800
14202 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14203
14204 @smallexample
14205 @group
14206 (and (< (point) region-end)
14207 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14208 @end group
14209 @end smallexample
14210
14211 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14212 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14213 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14214 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14215 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14216
14217 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14218 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14219 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14220 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14221 search failed because there were no words to find.
14222
14223 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14224 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14225 part of the do-again-test.
14226
14227 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14228 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14229 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14230 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14231 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14232 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14233
14234 @need 1200
14235 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14236 function looks like this:
14237
14238 @smallexample
14239 @group
14240 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14241 ;; @r{then}
14242 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14243 ;; @r{else}
14244 @var{return-zero})
14245 @end group
14246 @end smallexample
14247
14248 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14249
14250 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14251 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14252 systematically.
14253
14254 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14255 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14256 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14257 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14258 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14259
14260 @need 800
14261 Consider several cases:
14262
14263 @itemize @bullet
14264 @item
14265 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14266 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14267 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14268 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14269
14270 @item
14271 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14272 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14273 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14274 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14275
14276 @item
14277 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14278 @end itemize
14279
14280 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14281 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14282 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14283 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14284
14285 @need 1200
14286 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14287 adds one to its argument.
14288
14289 @smallexample
14290 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14291 @end smallexample
14292
14293 @need 1200
14294 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14295 this:
14296
14297 @smallexample
14298 @group
14299 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14300 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14301
14302 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14303 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14304 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14305 @end group
14306
14307 @group
14308 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14309 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14310
14311 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14312 0))
14313 @end group
14314 @end smallexample
14315
14316 @need 1250
14317 Let's examine how this works:
14318
14319 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14320 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14321
14322 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14323 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14324 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14325 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14326 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14327 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14328 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14329
14330 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14331 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14332 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14333 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14334 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14335 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14336 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14337 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14338
14339 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14340 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14341 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14342 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14343 the correct amount.
14344
14345 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14346 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14347 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14348 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14349
14350 @need 1250
14351 @noindent
14352 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14353
14354 @need 1250
14355 @noindent
14356 The recursive function:
14357
14358 @findex recursive-count-words
14359 @smallexample
14360 @group
14361 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14362 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14363 @end group
14364
14365 @group
14366 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14367 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14368 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14369 @end group
14370
14371 @group
14372 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14373 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14374
14375 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14376 0))
14377 @end group
14378 @end smallexample
14379
14380 @need 800
14381 @noindent
14382 The wrapper:
14383
14384 @smallexample
14385 @group
14386 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14387 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14388 "Print number of words in the region.
14389 @end group
14390
14391 @group
14392 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14393 character followed by at least one character that is
14394 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14395 determines which characters these are."
14396 @end group
14397 @group
14398 (interactive "r")
14399 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14400 (save-excursion
14401 (goto-char beginning)
14402 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14403 @end group
14404 @group
14405 (cond ((zerop count)
14406 (message
14407 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14408 @end group
14409 @group
14410 ((= 1 count)
14411 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14412 (t
14413 (message
14414 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14415 @end group
14416 @end smallexample
14417
14418 @node Counting Exercise
14419 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14420
14421 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14422 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14423 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14424
14425 @node Words in a defun
14426 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14427 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14428 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14429
14430 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14431 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14432 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting via
14433 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14434 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14435 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14436 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14437
14438 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14439 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14440 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14441 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14442 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14443 and this will tell.
14444
14445 @menu
14446 * Divide and Conquer::
14447 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14448 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14449 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14450 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14451 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14452 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14453 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14454 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14455 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14456 @end menu
14457
14458 @ifnottex
14459 @node Divide and Conquer
14460 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14461 @end ifnottex
14462
14463 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14464 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14465 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14466 steps must be:
14467
14468 @itemize @bullet
14469 @item
14470 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14471 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14472
14473 @item
14474 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14475 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14476 function.
14477
14478 @item
14479 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14480 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14481 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14482 definitions within them.
14483
14484 @item
14485 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14486 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14487 a graph.
14488
14489 @item
14490 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14491 @end itemize
14492
14493 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14494 be difficult.
14495
14496 @node Words and Symbols
14497 @section What to Count?
14498 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14499
14500 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14501 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14502 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14503 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14504 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14505 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14506 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14507 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14508 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14509 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14510 of ten words and symbols.
14511
14512 @smallexample
14513 @group
14514 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14515 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14516 (* 7 number))
14517 @end group
14518 @end smallexample
14519
14520 @noindent
14521 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14522 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14523 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14524 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14525 ten! Something is wrong!
14526
14527 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14528 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14529 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14530 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14531 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14532 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14533
14534 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14535 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14536 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14537 regexp is:
14538
14539 @smallexample
14540 "\\w+\\W*"
14541 @end smallexample
14542
14543 @noindent
14544 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14545 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14546 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14547 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14548 of its own.
14549
14550 @node Syntax
14551 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14552 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14553
14554 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14555 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14556 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14557 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14558 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14559 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14560 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14561 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14562 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14563
14564 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14565 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14566 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14567 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14568 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14569 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14570 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14571
14572 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14573 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14574
14575 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14576 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14577 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14578 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14579 constituent character; there are others, too.
14580
14581 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14582 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14583 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14584
14585 @need 1200
14586 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14587 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14588
14589 @smallexample
14590 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14591 @end smallexample
14592
14593 @noindent
14594 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14595 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14596 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14597 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14598 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14599 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14600 characters must be matched at least once.
14601
14602 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14603 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14604 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14605 I thought I could define this with the following:
14606
14607 @smallexample
14608 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14609 @end smallexample
14610
14611 @noindent
14612 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14613 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14614 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14615 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14616
14617 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14618 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14619 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14620 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14621 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14622 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14623 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14624 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14625 then followed optionally by white space.
14626
14627 @need 800
14628 Here is the full regular expression:
14629
14630 @smallexample
14631 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14632 @end smallexample
14633
14634 @node count-words-in-defun
14635 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14636 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14637
14638 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14639 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14640 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14641 versions.
14642
14643 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14644 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14645 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14646 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14647 simplify the definition a little.
14648
14649 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14650 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14651 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14652 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14653 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14654 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14655 function.
14656
14657 @need 1250
14658 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14659
14660 @smallexample
14661 @group
14662 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14663 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14664 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14665 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14666 @var{return count})
14667 @end group
14668 @end smallexample
14669
14670 @noindent
14671 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14672
14673 First, the set up.
14674
14675 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14676 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14677 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14678 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14679 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14680 end of the definition.
14681
14682 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14683 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14684 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14685 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14686 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14687 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14688 place point where we wish to start.
14689
14690 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14691 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14692 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14693
14694 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14695 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14696 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14697 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14698
14699 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14700 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14701 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14702 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14703 looping.
14704
14705 @need 1250
14706 The code looks like this:
14707
14708 @smallexample
14709 @group
14710 (beginning-of-defun)
14711 (let ((count 0)
14712 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14713 @end group
14714 @end smallexample
14715
14716 @noindent
14717 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14718 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14719 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14720 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14721 definition.
14722
14723 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14724 is the @code{while} loop.
14725
14726 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14727 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
14728 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
14729 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
14730 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
14731 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
14732
14733 @smallexample
14734 @group
14735 (while (and (< (point) end)
14736 (re-search-forward
14737 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
14738 (setq count (1+ count)))
14739 @end group
14740 @end smallexample
14741
14742 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
14743 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
14744 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
14745 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
14746
14747 @need 1250
14748 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
14749
14750 @findex count-words-in-defun
14751 @smallexample
14752 @group
14753 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14754 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
14755 (beginning-of-defun)
14756 (let ((count 0)
14757 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14758 @end group
14759 @group
14760 (while
14761 (and (< (point) end)
14762 (re-search-forward
14763 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14764 end t))
14765 (setq count (1+ count)))
14766 count))
14767 @end group
14768 @end smallexample
14769
14770 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
14771 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
14772 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
14773 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
14774
14775 @smallexample
14776 @group
14777 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
14778 (defun count-words-defun ()
14779 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
14780 (interactive)
14781 (message
14782 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
14783 @end group
14784 @group
14785 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
14786 (cond
14787 ((zerop count)
14788 (message
14789 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
14790 @end group
14791 @group
14792 ((= 1 count)
14793 (message
14794 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
14795 (t
14796 (message
14797 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
14798 @end group
14799 @end smallexample
14800
14801 @need 800
14802 @noindent
14803 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
14804
14805 @smallexample
14806 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
14807 @end smallexample
14808
14809 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
14810 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
14811 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
14812
14813 @smallexample
14814 @group
14815 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14816 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14817 (* 7 number))
14818 @result{} 10
14819 @end group
14820 @end smallexample
14821
14822 @noindent
14823 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
14824
14825 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
14826 several definitions within a single file.
14827
14828 @node Several defuns
14829 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
14830
14831 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
14832 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
14833 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
14834 statistics on one file.
14835
14836 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
14837 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
14838
14839 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
14840 file with information about many other files; this means that the
14841 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
14842 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
14843 messages.
14844
14845 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
14846 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
14847 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
14848 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
14849 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
14850
14851 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
14852 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
14853 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
14854 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
14855 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
14856 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
14857 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
14858 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
14859 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
14860 is almost all there is to it.
14861
14862 @need 800
14863 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
14864
14865 @smallexample
14866 @group
14867 (goto-char (point-min))
14868 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14869 (setq lengths-list
14870 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14871 @end group
14872 @end smallexample
14873
14874 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
14875 contains the function definitions.
14876
14877 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
14878 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
14879 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
14880
14881 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
14882
14883 @node Find a File
14884 @section Find a File
14885 @cindex Find a File
14886
14887 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
14888 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
14889 problem.
14890
14891 @need 1200
14892 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
14893
14894 @smallexample
14895 @group
14896 (defun find-file (filename)
14897 "Edit file FILENAME.
14898 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14899 creating one if none already exists."
14900 (interactive "FFind file: ")
14901 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
14902 @end group
14903 @end smallexample
14904
14905 @noindent
14906 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
14907 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
14908 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
14909 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
14910 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
14911
14912 @ignore
14913 In Emacs 22
14914 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
14915 "Edit file FILENAME.
14916 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14917 creating one if none already exists.
14918 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
14919 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
14920 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
14921
14922 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
14923 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
14924 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
14925
14926 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
14927 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
14928 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
14929 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
14930 (if (listp value)
14931 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
14932 (switch-to-buffer value))))
14933 @end ignore
14934
14935 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
14936 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
14937 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
14938 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
14939 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
14940
14941 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
14942 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
14943 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
14944 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
14945 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
14946 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
14947
14948 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
14949 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
14950 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
14951 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
14952 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
14953 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
14954 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
14955
14956 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
14957 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
14958 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
14959 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
14960 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
14961 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
14962 our own expression.
14963
14964 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
14965
14966 @node lengths-list-file
14967 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
14968
14969 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
14970 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
14971 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
14972 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
14973 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
14974 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
14975 @findex lengths-list-file
14976
14977 @smallexample
14978 @group
14979 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
14980 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
14981 The returned list is a list of numbers.
14982 Each number is the number of words or
14983 symbols in one function definition."
14984 @end group
14985 @group
14986 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
14987 (save-excursion
14988 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
14989 (lengths-list))
14990 (set-buffer buffer)
14991 (setq buffer-read-only t)
14992 (widen)
14993 (goto-char (point-min))
14994 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14995 (setq lengths-list
14996 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14997 (kill-buffer buffer)
14998 lengths-list)))
14999 @end group
15000 @end smallexample
15001
15002 @noindent
15003 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15004 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15005 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15006 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15007 message.
15008
15009 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15010 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15011 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15012 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15013
15014 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15015 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15016 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15017 variable.
15018
15019 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15020
15021 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15022 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15023 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15024 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15025 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15026 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15027 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15028 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15029 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15030 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15031
15032 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15033 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15034 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15035 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15036 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15037 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15038 won't.
15039
15040 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15041 beginning of the buffer.
15042
15043 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15044 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15045 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15046
15047 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15048 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15049 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15050 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15051 of the files.
15052
15053 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15054 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15055 the whole function.
15056
15057 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15058 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15059 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15060
15061 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15062 @smallexample
15063 (lengths-list-file
15064 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15065 @end smallexample
15066
15067 @noindent
15068 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15069 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15070 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15071
15072 @need 1200
15073 @noindent
15074 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15075 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15076
15077 @smallexample
15078 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15079 @end smallexample
15080
15081 @noindent
15082 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15083 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15084
15085 @need 1200
15086 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15087 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15088
15089 @smallexample
15090 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15091 @end smallexample
15092
15093 @need 1500
15094 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15095 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15096
15097 @smallexample
15098 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15099 @end smallexample
15100
15101 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15102 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15103
15104 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15105 the list.
15106
15107 @node Several files
15108 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15109
15110 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15111 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15112 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15113 a list of files.
15114
15115 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15116 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15117
15118 @menu
15119 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15120 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15121 @end menu
15122
15123 @ifnottex
15124 @node lengths-list-many-files
15125 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15126 @end ifnottex
15127
15128 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15129 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15130 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15131 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15132 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15133 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15134 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15135 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15136 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15137
15138 @need 800
15139 The template looks like this:
15140
15141 @smallexample
15142 @group
15143 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15144 @var{body}@dots{}
15145 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15146 @end group
15147 @end smallexample
15148
15149 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15150 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15151 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15152 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15153 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15154 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15155 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15156 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15157 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15158 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15159
15160 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15161 @need 1250
15162 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15163
15164 @smallexample
15165 @group
15166 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15167 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15168 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15169 @end group
15170 @group
15171 (let (lengths-list)
15172
15173 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15174 (while list-of-files
15175 (setq lengths-list
15176 (append
15177 lengths-list
15178
15179 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15180 (lengths-list-file
15181 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15182 @end group
15183
15184 @group
15185 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15186 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15187
15188 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15189 lengths-list))
15190 @end group
15191 @end smallexample
15192
15193 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15194 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15195 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15196
15197 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15198 @need 1500
15199 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15200 Emacs is visiting the
15201 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15202
15203 @smallexample
15204 debug.el
15205 @end smallexample
15206
15207 @need 800
15208 @noindent
15209 becomes
15210
15211 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15212 @smallexample
15213 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15214 @end smallexample
15215
15216 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15217 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15218 itself.
15219
15220 @node append
15221 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15222
15223 @need 800
15224 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15225
15226 @smallexample
15227 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15228 @end smallexample
15229
15230 @need 800
15231 @noindent
15232 produces the list
15233
15234 @smallexample
15235 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15236 @end smallexample
15237
15238 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15239 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15240 @code{cons},
15241
15242 @smallexample
15243 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15244 @end smallexample
15245
15246 @need 1250
15247 @noindent
15248 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15249 becomes the first element of the new list:
15250
15251 @smallexample
15252 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15253 @end smallexample
15254
15255 @node Several files recursively
15256 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15257
15258 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15259 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15260 is short and simple.
15261
15262 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15263 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15264 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15265 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15266 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15267 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15268 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15269 function is shorter than this description!
15270 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15271
15272 @smallexample
15273 @group
15274 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15275 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15276 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15277 (append
15278 (lengths-list-file
15279 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15280 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15281 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15282 @end group
15283 @end smallexample
15284
15285 @noindent
15286 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15287 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15288 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15289
15290 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15291 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15292 individually.
15293
15294 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15295 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15296 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15297 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15298 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15299 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15300
15301 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15302 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15303 Emacs may produce different results.)
15304
15305 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15306 @smallexample
15307 @group
15308 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15309
15310 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15311 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15312 @end group
15313
15314 @group
15315 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15316 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15317 @end group
15318
15319 @group
15320 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15321 @result{} (85 181)
15322 @end group
15323
15324 @group
15325 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15326 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15327 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15328 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15329 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15330 @end group
15331 @end smallexample
15332
15333 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15334 output we want.
15335
15336 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15337
15338 @node Prepare the data
15339 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15340
15341 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15342 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15343 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15344 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15345 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15346 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15347 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15348
15349 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15350 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15351 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15352 numbers.
15353
15354 @menu
15355 * Data for Display in Detail::
15356 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15357 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15358 * Counting function definitions::
15359 @end menu
15360
15361 @ifnottex
15362 @node Data for Display in Detail
15363 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15364 @end ifnottex
15365
15366 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15367 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15368 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15369 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15370
15371 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15372 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15373 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15374 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15375 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15376 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15377 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15378 that we will need.
15379
15380 @node Sorting
15381 @subsection Sorting Lists
15382 @findex sort
15383
15384 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15385 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15386 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15387 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15388
15389 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15390 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15391 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15392 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15393 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15394 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15395 alphabetize a list.
15396
15397 @need 1250
15398 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15399
15400 @smallexample
15401 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15402 @end smallexample
15403
15404 @need 800
15405 @noindent
15406 produces this:
15407
15408 @smallexample
15409 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15410 @end smallexample
15411
15412 @noindent
15413 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15414 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15415 arguments.)
15416
15417 Sorting the list returned by the
15418 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15419 it uses the @code{<} function:
15420
15421 @ignore
15422 2006 Oct 29
15423 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15424 (progn
15425 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15426 (sort
15427 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15428 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15429 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15430 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15431 '<))
15432
15433 @end ignore
15434
15435 @smallexample
15436 @group
15437 (sort
15438 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15439 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15440 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15441 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15442 '<)
15443 @end group
15444 @end smallexample
15445
15446 @need 800
15447 @noindent
15448 which produces:
15449
15450 @smallexample
15451 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15452 @end smallexample
15453
15454 @noindent
15455 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15456 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15457 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15458
15459 @node Files List
15460 @subsection Making a List of Files
15461
15462 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15463 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15464 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15465 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15466 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15467 recursive call.
15468
15469 @findex directory-files
15470 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15471 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15472 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15473 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15474 pattern within a single directory.
15475
15476 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15477 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15478 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15479 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15480 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15481 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15482
15483 @findex files-in-below-directory
15484 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15485 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15486 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15487 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15488 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15489 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15490
15491 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15492 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15493 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15494
15495 @smallexample
15496 @group
15497 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15498 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15499 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15500 @end group
15501 @end smallexample
15502
15503 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15504 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15505 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15506 file---which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15507 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15508 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15509 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15510
15511 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15512 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15513 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15514 directory or a symbolic link.
15515
15516 @need 1000
15517 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15518 its attributes:
15519
15520 @smallexample
15521 @group
15522 ("abbrev.el"
15523 nil
15524 1
15525 1000
15526 100
15527 @end group
15528 @group
15529 (20615 27034 579989 697000)
15530 (17905 55681 0 0)
15531 (20615 26327 734791 805000)
15532 13188
15533 "-rw-r--r--"
15534 @end group
15535 @group
15536 t
15537 2971624
15538 773)
15539 @end group
15540 @end smallexample
15541
15542 @need 1200
15543 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15544 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15545
15546 @smallexample
15547 @group
15548 ("mail"
15549 t
15550 @dots{}
15551 )
15552 @end group
15553 @end smallexample
15554
15555 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15556 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15557 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15558 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15559
15560 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15561 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15562 any directories below that directory.
15563
15564 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15565 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15566 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15567 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15568 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15569
15570 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15571 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15572 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15573 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15574 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15575 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15576 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15577 directory.
15578
15579 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15580 several tasks:
15581
15582 @itemize @bullet
15583 @item
15584 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15585 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15586
15587 @item
15588 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15589 directory; and if so,
15590
15591 @itemize @minus
15592 @item
15593 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15594 so skip it.
15595
15596 @item
15597 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15598 @end itemize
15599 @end itemize
15600
15601 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15602 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15603 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15604 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15605 pattern is `accumulate'
15606 (@pxref{Accumulate}),
15607 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15608
15609 @ignore
15610 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15611 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15612
15613 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15614 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15615 @end ignore
15616
15617 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15618
15619 @need 800
15620 Here is the function:
15621
15622 @smallexample
15623 @group
15624 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15625 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15626 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15627 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15628 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15629 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15630 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15631 @end group
15632 @group
15633 (let (el-files-list
15634 (current-directory-list
15635 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15636 ;; while we are in the current directory
15637 (while current-directory-list
15638 @end group
15639 @group
15640 (cond
15641 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15642 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15643 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15644 (setq el-files-list
15645 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15646 @end group
15647 @group
15648 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15649 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15650 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15651 (if
15652 (equal "."
15653 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15654 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15655 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15656 ()
15657 @end group
15658 @group
15659 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15660 (setq el-files-list
15661 (append
15662 (files-in-below-directory
15663 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15664 el-files-list)))))
15665 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15666 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15667 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15668 ;; return the filenames
15669 el-files-list))
15670 @end group
15671 @end smallexample
15672
15673 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15674 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15675
15676 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15677 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15678
15679 @need 1250
15680 Thus, on my system,
15681
15682 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15683
15684 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15685 @smallexample
15686 @group
15687 (length
15688 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15689 @end group
15690 @end smallexample
15691
15692 @noindent
15693 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15694 @samp{.el} files.
15695
15696 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15697 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15698 like this:
15699
15700 @smallexample
15701 @group
15702 (sort
15703 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15704 'string-lessp)
15705 @end group
15706 @end smallexample
15707
15708 @ignore
15709 (defun test ()
15710 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15711 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15712 (sit-for 0)
15713 (sort
15714 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15715 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15716 '<)
15717 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15718 @end ignore
15719
15720 @node Counting function definitions
15721 @subsection Counting function definitions
15722
15723 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15724 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15725 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15726 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15727
15728 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
15729 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
15730 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
15731 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
15732 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
15733 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
15734 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
15735
15736 @need 1200
15737 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
15738 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
15739 @vindex top-of-ranges
15740
15741 @smallexample
15742 @group
15743 (defvar top-of-ranges
15744 '(10 20 30 40 50
15745 60 70 80 90 100
15746 110 120 130 140 150
15747 160 170 180 190 200
15748 210 220 230 240 250
15749 260 270 280 290 300)
15750 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
15751 @end group
15752 @end smallexample
15753
15754 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
15755
15756 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
15757 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
15758 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
15759 as arguments.
15760
15761 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
15762 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
15763 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
15764 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
15765 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
15766 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
15767 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
15768 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
15769 top-of-range values in turn.
15770
15771 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
15772 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
15773 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
15774 small gear inside a big gear.
15775
15776 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
15777 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
15778 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
15779 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
15780 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
15781 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
15782 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
15783
15784 @need 1250
15785 The inner loop looks like this:
15786
15787 @smallexample
15788 @group
15789 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15790 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15791 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15792 @end group
15793 @end smallexample
15794
15795 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
15796 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
15797 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
15798
15799 @smallexample
15800 @group
15801 (while top-of-ranges
15802 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
15803 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15804 @end group
15805 @end smallexample
15806
15807 @need 1200
15808 Put together, the two loops look like this:
15809
15810 @smallexample
15811 @group
15812 (while top-of-ranges
15813
15814 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
15815 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15816 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15817 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15818
15819 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15820 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15821 @end group
15822 @end smallexample
15823
15824 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
15825 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
15826 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
15827 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
15828
15829 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
15830 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
15831 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
15832 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
15833 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
15834 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
15835 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
15836 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
15837 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
15838 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
15839 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
15840 @findex nreverse
15841
15842 @need 800
15843 For example,
15844
15845 @smallexample
15846 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
15847 @end smallexample
15848
15849 @need 800
15850 @noindent
15851 produces:
15852
15853 @smallexample
15854 (4 3 2 1)
15855 @end smallexample
15856
15857 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
15858 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
15859 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
15860 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
15861 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
15862 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
15863 as is.)
15864 @findex reverse
15865
15866 @need 1250
15867 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
15868
15869 @smallexample
15870 @group
15871 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
15872 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
15873 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
15874 (number-within-range 0)
15875 defuns-per-range-list)
15876 @end group
15877
15878 @group
15879 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
15880 (while top-of-ranges
15881 @end group
15882
15883 @group
15884 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
15885 (while (and
15886 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
15887 (car sorted-lengths)
15888 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15889 @end group
15890
15891 @group
15892 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
15893 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15894 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15895
15896 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
15897 @end group
15898
15899 @group
15900 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15901 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
15902 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
15903 @end group
15904
15905 @group
15906 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15907 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
15908 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
15909 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
15910 @end group
15911
15912 @group
15913 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
15914 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
15915 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15916 (cons
15917 (length sorted-lengths)
15918 defuns-per-range-list))
15919 @end group
15920
15921 @group
15922 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
15923 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
15924 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
15925 @end group
15926 @end smallexample
15927
15928 @need 1200
15929 @noindent
15930 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
15931 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
15932
15933 @smallexample
15934 @group
15935 (and (car sorted-lengths)
15936 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15937 @end group
15938 @end smallexample
15939
15940 @need 800
15941 @noindent
15942 instead of like this:
15943
15944 @smallexample
15945 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
15946 @end smallexample
15947
15948 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
15949 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
15950 range.
15951
15952 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
15953 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
15954 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
15955 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
15956 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
15957 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
15958
15959 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
15960 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
15961 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
15962 the test will fail.
15963
15964 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15965 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
15966 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
15967 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
15968 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
15969 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
15970 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
15971 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15972 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
15973 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
15974 of the @code{and} expression.
15975
15976 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
15977 This way, we avoid an error.
15978 @iftex
15979 @noindent
15980 (For information about @code{and}, see
15981 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
15982 @end iftex
15983 @ifinfo
15984 @noindent
15985 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
15986 information about @code{and}.)
15987 @end ifinfo
15988
15989 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
15990 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
15991 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
15992 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
15993 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
15994
15995 @smallexample
15996 @group
15997 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
15998 (setq top-of-ranges
15999 '(110 120 130 140 150
16000 160 170 180 190 200))
16001
16002 (setq sorted-lengths
16003 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16004
16005 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16006 @end group
16007 @end smallexample
16008
16009 @need 800
16010 @noindent
16011 The list returned looks like this:
16012
16013 @smallexample
16014 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16015 @end smallexample
16016
16017 @noindent
16018 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16019 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16020 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16021 of 200 or larger.
16022
16023 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16024 @node Readying a Graph
16025 @chapter Readying a Graph
16026 @cindex Readying a graph
16027 @cindex Graph prototype
16028 @cindex Prototype graph
16029 @cindex Body of graph
16030
16031 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16032 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16033
16034 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16035 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16036 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16037 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16038 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16039 more.
16040
16041 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16042 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16043 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16044 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16045 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16046 the function to label the axes automatically.
16047
16048 @menu
16049 * Columns of a graph::
16050 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16051 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16052 * Printed Axes::
16053 * Line Graph Exercise::
16054 @end menu
16055
16056 @ifnottex
16057 @node Columns of a graph
16058 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16059 @end ifnottex
16060
16061 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16062 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16063 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16064 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16065 symbol a user option.
16066
16067 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16068 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16069 label the graph, but only print its body.
16070
16071 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16072 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16073 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16074 @code{numbers-list}.
16075
16076 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16077 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16078
16079 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16080 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16081 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16082 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16083
16084 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16085 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16086 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16087 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16088 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16089 @findex apropos
16090
16091 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16092 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16093 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16094 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16095 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16096 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16097 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16098 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16099 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16100 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16101
16102 @need 1200
16103 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16104
16105 @smallexample
16106 @group
16107 insert-rectangle:
16108 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16109 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16110 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16111 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16112 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16113 and point is at the lower right corner.
16114 @end group
16115 @end smallexample
16116
16117 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16118
16119 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16120 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16121 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16122 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16123 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16124
16125 @smallexample
16126 @group
16127 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16128 second
16129 thirdnil
16130 @end group
16131 @end smallexample
16132
16133 @noindent
16134 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16135 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16136 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16137 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16138 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16139 column of strings.
16140
16141 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16142 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16143 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16144 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16145 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16146 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16147 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16148 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16149 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16150 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16151
16152 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16153 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16154 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16155 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16156 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16157 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16158
16159 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16160 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16161 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16162 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16163 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16164 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16165 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16166 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16167
16168 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16169 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16170 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16171 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16172 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16173 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16174 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16175 be difficult.
16176
16177 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16178 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16179 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16180 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16181 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16182 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16183 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16184 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16185
16186 @smallexample
16187 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16188 @end smallexample
16189
16190 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16191 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16192 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16193 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16194 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16195 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16196 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16197 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16198 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16199 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16200 example,
16201
16202 @smallexample
16203 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16204 @end smallexample
16205
16206 @noindent
16207 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16208 smallest of all its arguments.)
16209 @findex max
16210 @findex min
16211
16212 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16213 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16214 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16215
16216 @smallexample
16217 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16218 @end smallexample
16219
16220 @need 800
16221 @noindent
16222 produces the following error message;
16223
16224 @smallexample
16225 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16226 @end smallexample
16227
16228 @findex apply
16229 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16230 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16231 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16232 may be a list.
16233
16234 @need 1250
16235 For example,
16236
16237 @smallexample
16238 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16239 @end smallexample
16240
16241 @noindent
16242 returns 8.
16243
16244 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16245 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16246 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16247 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16248 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16249 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16250 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16251 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16252 it.)
16253
16254 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16255 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16256 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16257
16258 @smallexample
16259 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16260 @end smallexample
16261
16262 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16263 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16264 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16265 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16266 sorted or not.)
16267
16268 @need 800
16269 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16270
16271 @smallexample
16272 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16273 @end smallexample
16274
16275 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16276 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16277 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16278 function should return a list of strings for the
16279 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16280
16281 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16282 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16283 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16284 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16285 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16286 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16287
16288 @smallexample
16289 @group
16290 ;;; @r{First version.}
16291 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16292 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16293 (let ((insert-list nil)
16294 (number-of-top-blanks
16295 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16296 @end group
16297
16298 @group
16299 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16300 (while (> actual-height 0)
16301 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16302 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16303 @end group
16304
16305 @group
16306 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16307 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16308 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16309 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16310 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16311 @end group
16312
16313 @group
16314 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16315 insert-list))
16316 @end group
16317 @end smallexample
16318
16319 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16320 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16321
16322 @smallexample
16323 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16324 @end smallexample
16325
16326 @need 800
16327 @noindent
16328 returns
16329
16330 @smallexample
16331 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16332 @end smallexample
16333
16334 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16335 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16336 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16337 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16338 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16339 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16340 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16341 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16342 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16343 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16344 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16345 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16346 those variables separately.
16347
16348 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16349 lead us to the second version of the function:
16350
16351 @smallexample
16352 @group
16353 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16354 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16355 @end group
16356
16357 @group
16358 (defvar graph-blank " "
16359 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16360 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16361 as graph-symbol.")
16362 @end group
16363 @end smallexample
16364
16365 @noindent
16366 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16367 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16368
16369 @smallexample
16370 @group
16371 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16372 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16373 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16374
16375 @end group
16376 @group
16377 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16378 of the list.
16379 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16380 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16381 @end group
16382
16383 @group
16384 (let ((insert-list nil)
16385 (number-of-top-blanks
16386 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16387 @end group
16388
16389 @group
16390 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16391 (while (> actual-height 0)
16392 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16393 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16394 @end group
16395
16396 @group
16397 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16398 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16399 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16400 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16401 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16402
16403 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16404 insert-list))
16405 @end group
16406 @end smallexample
16407
16408 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16409 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16410 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16411 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16412 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16413 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16414 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16415 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16416 the list.
16417
16418 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16419 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16420 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16421 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16422 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16423 simple.
16424
16425 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16426 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16427 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16428
16429 @node graph-body-print
16430 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16431 @findex graph-body-print
16432
16433 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16434 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16435 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16436 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16437 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16438 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16439 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16440
16441 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16442 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16443
16444 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16445 version of this function:
16446
16447 @smallexample
16448 @group
16449 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16450 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16451 (let ((height @dots{}
16452 @dots{}))
16453 @end group
16454
16455 @group
16456 (while numbers-list
16457 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16458 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16459 @end group
16460 @end smallexample
16461
16462 @noindent
16463 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16464
16465 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16466 determine the height of the graph.
16467
16468 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16469 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16470 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16471 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16472
16473 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16474 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16475 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16476 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16477 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16478 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16479 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16480
16481 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16482 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16483 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16484 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16485 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16486 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16487 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16488 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16489 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16490
16491 @need 1250
16492 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16493
16494 @smallexample
16495 @group
16496 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16497 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16498 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16499
16500 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16501 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16502 from-position)
16503 @end group
16504
16505 @group
16506 (while numbers-list
16507 (setq from-position (point))
16508 (insert-rectangle
16509 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16510 (goto-char from-position)
16511 (forward-char symbol-width)
16512 @end group
16513 @group
16514 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16515 (sit-for 0)
16516 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16517 @end group
16518 @group
16519 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16520 (forward-line height)
16521 (insert "\n")
16522 ))
16523 @end group
16524 @end smallexample
16525
16526 @noindent
16527 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16528 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16529 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16530 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16531 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16532 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16533 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16534 function exits.
16535
16536 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16537
16538 @enumerate
16539 @item
16540 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16541 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16542 @iftex
16543 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16544 @end iftex
16545 @ifinfo
16546 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16547 @end ifinfo
16548 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16549
16550 @need 800
16551 @item
16552 Copy the following expression:
16553
16554 @smallexample
16555 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16556 @end smallexample
16557
16558 @item
16559 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16560 want the graph to start.
16561
16562 @item
16563 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16564
16565 @item
16566 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16567 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16568
16569 @item
16570 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16571 @end enumerate
16572
16573 @need 800
16574 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16575
16576 @smallexample
16577 @group
16578 *
16579 * **
16580 * ****
16581 *** ****
16582 ********* *
16583 ************
16584 *************
16585 @end group
16586 @end smallexample
16587
16588 @node recursive-graph-body-print
16589 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16590 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16591
16592 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16593 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16594 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16595 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16596 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16597 the graph.
16598
16599 @need 1250
16600 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16601
16602 @smallexample
16603 @group
16604 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16605 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16606 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16607 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16608 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16609 from-position)
16610 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16611 numbers-list
16612 height
16613 symbol-width)))
16614 @end group
16615 @end smallexample
16616
16617 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16618 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16619 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16620 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16621 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16622 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16623 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16624 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16625 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16626
16627 @smallexample
16628 @group
16629 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16630 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16631 "Print a bar graph.
16632 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16633 @end group
16634
16635 @group
16636 (when numbers-list
16637 (setq from-position (point))
16638 (insert-rectangle
16639 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16640 @end group
16641 @group
16642 (goto-char from-position)
16643 (forward-char symbol-width)
16644 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16645 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16646 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16647 @end group
16648 @end smallexample
16649
16650 @need 1250
16651 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16652
16653 @smallexample
16654 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16655 @end smallexample
16656
16657 @need 800
16658 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16659
16660 @smallexample
16661 @group
16662 *
16663 ** *
16664 **** *
16665 **** ***
16666 * *********
16667 ************
16668 *************
16669 @end group
16670 @end smallexample
16671
16672 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16673 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16674
16675 @node Printed Axes
16676 @section Need for Printed Axes
16677
16678 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16679 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16680 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16681
16682 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16683 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16684 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16685 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16686 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16687
16688 @node Line Graph Exercise
16689 @section Exercise
16690
16691 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16692
16693 @node Emacs Initialization
16694 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16695 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16696 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16697 @cindex Initialization file
16698
16699 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---this seemingly
16700 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16701 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16702 it to suit themselves.
16703
16704 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16705 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16706
16707 @menu
16708 * Default Configuration::
16709 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16710 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16711 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
16712 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16713 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16714 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16715 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16716 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16717 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16718 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16719 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16720 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16721 * Miscellaneous::
16722 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16723 @end menu
16724
16725 @ifnottex
16726 @node Default Configuration
16727 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
16728 @end ifnottex
16729
16730 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
16731 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
16732 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
16733 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
16734 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
16735 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
16736 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
16737 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
16738 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
16739 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
16740
16741 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
16742 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
16743
16744 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
16745 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
16746 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
16747
16748 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
16749 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
16750 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
16751 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
16752 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
16753 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
16754 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
16755 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
16756
16757 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
16758 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
16759 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
16760 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
16761
16762 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
16763 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
16764 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
16765
16766 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
16767 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
16768 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
16769 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
16770 Manual}.
16771
16772 @node Site-wide Init
16773 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
16774
16775 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
16776 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
16777 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
16778 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
16779 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
16780 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
16781 everyone.
16782
16783 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
16784 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
16785 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
16786 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
16787 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
16788 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
16789 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
16790 @file{INSTALL} file.)
16791
16792 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
16793 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
16794 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
16795 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
16796 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
16797
16798 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
16799 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
16800 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
16801 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
16802 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
16803 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
16804 Simple Extension}.)
16805
16806 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
16807 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
16808 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
16809
16810 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
16811 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
16812 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
16813
16814 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
16815 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
16816 initialization file.
16817
16818 @node defcustom
16819 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
16820 @findex defcustom
16821
16822 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
16823 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
16824 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
16825 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
16826 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
16827 file.)
16828
16829 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} macro.
16830 Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables that
16831 users set, the @code{defcustom} macro is designed for the job.
16832
16833 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
16834 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
16835 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
16836 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
16837 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
16838 documentation.
16839
16840 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
16841 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
16842 arguments are optional.)
16843
16844 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
16845 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
16846
16847 @need 1250
16848 For example, the customizable user option variable
16849 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
16850
16851 @smallexample
16852 @group
16853 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
16854 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
16855 :type 'hook
16856 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
16857 :group 'wp)
16858 @end group
16859 @end smallexample
16860
16861 @noindent
16862 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
16863 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
16864
16865 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
16866 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
16867 Customization buffer.
16868
16869 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
16870 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
16871 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
16872 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
16873 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
16874 user.
16875
16876 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
16877 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
16878 find it.
16879
16880 The @code{defcustom} macro recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
16881 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
16882 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
16883
16884 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
16885
16886 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
16887 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
16888
16889 @need 800
16890 Using the customization command, you can type:
16891
16892 @smallexample
16893 M-x customize
16894 @end smallexample
16895
16896 @noindent
16897 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
16898 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
16899 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
16900 values. After you click on the button to
16901
16902 @smallexample
16903 Save for Future Sessions
16904 @end smallexample
16905
16906 @noindent
16907 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
16908 It will look like this:
16909
16910 @smallexample
16911 @group
16912 (custom-set-variables
16913 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
16914 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
16915 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
16916 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
16917 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
16918 @end group
16919 @end smallexample
16920
16921 @noindent
16922 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
16923 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
16924 It comes on automatically.)
16925
16926 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
16927 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
16928 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
16929 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
16930 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
16931 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
16932
16933 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
16934 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
16935 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
16936 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
16937 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
16938
16939 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
16940 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
16941 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
16942
16943 @need 800
16944 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
16945 message that says
16946
16947 @smallexample
16948 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
16949 @end smallexample
16950
16951 @need 800
16952 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
16953
16954 @smallexample
16955 Save for Future Sessions
16956 @end smallexample
16957
16958 @noindent
16959 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
16960 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
16961 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
16962 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
16963 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
16964 forget, you may confuse yourself.
16965
16966 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
16967 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
16968 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
16969
16970 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
16971 expressions myself.
16972
16973 @findex defsubst
16974 @findex defconst
16975 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
16976 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
16977 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
16978 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
16979 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
16980 variable; but please do not.)
16981
16982 @node Beginning init File
16983 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
16984 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
16985
16986 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
16987 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
16988 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
16989
16990 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
16991 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
16992 definitions.
16993
16994 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
16995 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
16996
16997 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
16998 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
16999
17000 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17001 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17002 not.
17003
17004 @need 1200
17005 @smallexample
17006 @group
17007 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17008 ; Robert J. Chassell
17009 ; 26 September 1985
17010 @end group
17011 @end smallexample
17012
17013 @noindent
17014 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17015 adding to it ever since.
17016
17017 @smallexample
17018 @group
17019 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17020 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17021 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17022 ; three semicolons.
17023 @end group
17024 @end smallexample
17025
17026 @noindent
17027 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17028 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17029 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17030 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17031 more about comments.)
17032
17033 @smallexample
17034 @group
17035 ;;;; The Help Key
17036 ; Control-h is the help key;
17037 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17038 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17039 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17040 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17041 @end group
17042 @end smallexample
17043
17044 @noindent
17045 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17046
17047 @smallexample
17048 @group
17049 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17050 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17051 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17052 ; control-h m.
17053 @end group
17054 @end smallexample
17055
17056 @noindent
17057 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17058 all you need to know.
17059
17060 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17061 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17062 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17063 remember to look here to remind myself.
17064
17065 @node Text and Auto-fill
17066 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17067
17068 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17069 Auto Fill mode.
17070
17071 @smallexample
17072 @group
17073 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17074 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17075 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17076 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17077 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17078 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17079 @end group
17080 @end smallexample
17081
17082 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17083 besides remind a forgetful human!
17084
17085 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17086 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17087 other mode, such as C mode.
17088
17089 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17090 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17091 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17092 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17093 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17094 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17095 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17096 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17097 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17098 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17099 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17100 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17101
17102 @ifinfo
17103 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17104 Emacs Manual}.
17105
17106 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17107 Manual}.
17108 @end ifinfo
17109 @iftex
17110 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17111 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17112 @end iftex
17113
17114 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17115
17116 @need 800
17117 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17118
17119 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17120 @smallexample
17121 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17122 @end smallexample
17123
17124 @noindent
17125 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17126
17127 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17128 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17129 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17130 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17131 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17132 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17133 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17134 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17135 anywhere else in Emacs.
17136
17137 @need 800
17138 Here is the next line:
17139
17140 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17141 @findex add-hook
17142 @smallexample
17143 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17144 @end smallexample
17145
17146 @noindent
17147 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17148 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17149
17150 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17151 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17152
17153 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17154 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17155 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17156
17157 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17158 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17159 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17160
17161 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17162 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17163 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17164 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17165 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17166 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17167
17168 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17169 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17170 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17171 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17172
17173 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17174 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17175 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17176 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17177 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17178
17179 @need 1250
17180 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17181 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17182
17183 @smallexample
17184 (setq colon-double-space t)
17185 @end smallexample
17186
17187 @node Mail Aliases
17188 @section Mail Aliases
17189
17190 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17191 reminders.
17192
17193 @smallexample
17194 @group
17195 ;;; Mail mode
17196 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17197 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17198 ; type `M-x rmail'
17199 (setq mail-aliases t)
17200 @end group
17201 @end smallexample
17202
17203 @cindex Mail aliases
17204 @noindent
17205 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17206 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17207 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17208
17209 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17210 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17211 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17212
17213 @smallexample
17214 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17215 @end smallexample
17216
17217 @noindent
17218 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17219 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17220
17221 @node Indent Tabs Mode
17222 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17223 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17224 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17225
17226 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17227 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17228 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17229 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17230 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17231
17232 @need 1250
17233 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17234
17235 @smallexample
17236 @group
17237 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17238 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17239 @end group
17240 @end smallexample
17241
17242 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17243 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17244 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17245 values for the variable.
17246
17247 @ifinfo
17248 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17249
17250 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17251 Manual}.
17252 @end ifinfo
17253 @iftex
17254 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17255 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17256 @end iftex
17257
17258 @need 1700
17259 @node Keybindings
17260 @section Some Keybindings
17261
17262 Now for some personal keybindings:
17263
17264 @smallexample
17265 @group
17266 ;;; Compare windows
17267 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17268 @end group
17269 @end smallexample
17270
17271 @findex compare-windows
17272 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17273 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17274 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17275 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17276
17277 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17278
17279 @cindex Setting a key globally
17280 @cindex Global set key
17281 @cindex Key setting globally
17282 @findex global-set-key
17283 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17284 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17285 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17286 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17287 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17288 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17289 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17290 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17291 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17292 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17293 details.)
17294
17295 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17296 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17297 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17298
17299 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17300 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17301 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17302 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17303 adapt what is there.
17304
17305 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17306 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17307 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17308 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17309 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17310 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17311 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17312 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17313 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17314
17315 @need 1250
17316 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17317
17318 @smallexample
17319 @group
17320 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17321 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17322 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17323 @end group
17324 @end smallexample
17325
17326 @findex occur
17327 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17328 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17329 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17330 to jump to occurrences.
17331
17332 @findex global-unset-key
17333 @cindex Unbinding key
17334 @cindex Key unbinding
17335 @need 1250
17336 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17337 work:
17338
17339 @smallexample
17340 @group
17341 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17342 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17343 @end group
17344 @end smallexample
17345
17346 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17347 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17348 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17349 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17350 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17351
17352 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17353 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17354 @need 1250
17355 The following rebinds an existing key:
17356
17357 @smallexample
17358 @group
17359 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17360 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17361 @end group
17362 @end smallexample
17363
17364 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17365 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17366 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17367 almost always want to do something in that
17368 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17369 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17370 but moves point into that window.
17371
17372 @node Keymaps
17373 @section Keymaps
17374 @cindex Keymaps
17375 @cindex Rebinding keys
17376
17377 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17378 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17379 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17380 @code{current-global-map}.
17381
17382 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17383 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17384 all buffers.
17385
17386 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17387 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17388 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17389
17390 @smallexample
17391 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17392 @end smallexample
17393
17394 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17395 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17396 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17397 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17398 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17399
17400 @smallexample
17401 @group
17402 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17403 @end group
17404 @end smallexample
17405
17406 @noindent
17407 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17408 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17409 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17410 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17411 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17412 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17413 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17414
17415 @need 1250
17416 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17417
17418 @smallexample
17419 @group
17420 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17421 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17422 (interactive)
17423 (beginning-of-line)
17424 (insert "@@group\n"))
17425 @end group
17426 @end smallexample
17427
17428 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17429 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17430 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17431
17432 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17433 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17434 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17435
17436 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17437 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17438 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17439
17440 @node Loading Files
17441 @section Loading Files
17442 @cindex Loading files
17443 @c findex load
17444
17445 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17446 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17447 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17448 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17449
17450 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17451 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17452 For example:
17453
17454 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17455
17456 @smallexample
17457 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17458 @end smallexample
17459
17460 This evaluates, i.e., loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17461 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17462 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17463 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17464 1989.
17465
17466 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17467 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17468 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17469 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17470 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17471 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17472 window.
17473
17474 @need 1250
17475 To replace the key binding for the default
17476 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17477 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17478
17479 @smallexample
17480 @group
17481 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17482 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17483 @end group
17484 @end smallexample
17485
17486 @vindex load-path
17487 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17488 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17489 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17490 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17491 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17492 when Emacs is built.)
17493
17494 @need 1250
17495 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17496 existing load path:
17497
17498 @smallexample
17499 @group
17500 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17501 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17502 @end group
17503 @end smallexample
17504
17505 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17506 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17507
17508 @findex load-library
17509 @smallexample
17510 @group
17511 (defun load-library (library)
17512 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17513 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17514 (interactive
17515 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17516 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17517 load-path
17518 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17519 (load library))
17520 @end group
17521 @end smallexample
17522
17523 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17524 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17525 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17526
17527 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17528 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17529 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17530 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17531
17532 @node Autoload
17533 @section Autoloading
17534 @findex autoload
17535
17536 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17537 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17538 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17539 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17540
17541 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17542 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17543
17544 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17545 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17546 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17547
17548 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17549 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17550 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17551 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17552 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17553 @file{.emacs} file.
17554
17555 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17556 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17557 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17558 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17559 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17560 dumping.)
17561
17562 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17563 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17564 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17565 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17566 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17567 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17568 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17569 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17570 function (the default is a function).
17571
17572 @need 800
17573 Here is a typical example:
17574
17575 @smallexample
17576 @group
17577 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17578 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17579 @end group
17580 @end smallexample
17581
17582 @noindent
17583 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17584 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17585
17586 @noindent
17587 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17588 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17589 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17590 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17591 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17592 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17593 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17594 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17595 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17596 documentation is not available.)
17597
17598 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17599 Manual}, for more information.
17600
17601 @node Simple Extension
17602 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17603 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17604 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17605
17606 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17607 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17608 to read.
17609
17610 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17611 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17612 @file{.emacs} file.
17613
17614 @need 1250
17615 Here is the definition:
17616
17617 @smallexample
17618 @group
17619 ;;; Line to top of window;
17620 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17621 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17622 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17623 (interactive)
17624 (recenter 0))
17625 @end group
17626 @end smallexample
17627
17628 @need 1250
17629 Now for the keybinding.
17630
17631 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17632 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17633 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17634 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17635
17636 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17637 this:
17638
17639 @smallexample
17640 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17641 @end smallexample
17642
17643 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17644 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17645
17646 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17647 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17648 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17649 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17650 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17651 the following conditional:
17652
17653 @smallexample
17654 @group
17655 (cond
17656 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17657 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17658 ( @dots{} ))
17659 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17660 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17661 ( @dots{} )))
17662 @end group
17663 @end smallexample
17664
17665 For example, recent versions blink
17666 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17667 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17668 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17669 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17670
17671 @smallexample
17672 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17673
17674 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17675
17676 emacs -Q -D
17677 @end smallexample
17678 }:
17679
17680 @smallexample
17681 @group
17682 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17683 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17684 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17685 ;; at the end of the buffer
17686 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17687 @end group
17688 @group
17689 ;; Turn on image viewing
17690 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17691 @end group
17692 @group
17693 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17694 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17695 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17696 @end group
17697 @group
17698 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17699 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17700 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17701 @end group
17702 @group
17703 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17704 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17705 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17706 (tooltip-mode nil)
17707 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17708 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17709 )
17710 @end group
17711 @end smallexample
17712
17713 @node X11 Colors
17714 @section X11 Colors
17715
17716 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17717 system.
17718
17719 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17720
17721 @need 1250
17722 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17723 file that set values:
17724
17725 @smallexample
17726 @group
17727 ;; Set cursor color
17728 (set-cursor-color "white")
17729
17730 ;; Set mouse color
17731 (set-mouse-color "white")
17732
17733 ;; Set foreground and background
17734 (set-foreground-color "white")
17735 (set-background-color "darkblue")
17736 @end group
17737
17738 @group
17739 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
17740 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
17741 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
17742 @end group
17743
17744 @group
17745 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
17746 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
17747 @end group
17748
17749 @group
17750 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
17751 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
17752 @end group
17753
17754 @group
17755 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
17756 (setq calendar-load-hook
17757 (lambda ()
17758 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
17759 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
17760 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
17761 @end group
17762 @end smallexample
17763
17764 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
17765 the screen flicker.
17766
17767 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
17768 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
17769 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
17770 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
17771
17772 @smallexample
17773 @group
17774 Emacs*foreground: white
17775 Emacs*background: darkblue
17776 Emacs*cursorColor: white
17777 Emacs*pointerColor: white
17778 @end group
17779 @end smallexample
17780
17781 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
17782 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
17783 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
17784 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
17785
17786 @smallexample
17787 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
17788 @end smallexample
17789
17790 @need 1700
17791 @node Miscellaneous
17792 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
17793
17794 @need 1250
17795 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
17796 @sp 1
17797
17798 @itemize @minus
17799 @item
17800 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
17801
17802 @smallexample
17803 @group
17804 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
17805 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
17806 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
17807 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
17808 @end group
17809
17810 @group
17811 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
17812 "*emacs*mpointer")))
17813 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
17814 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
17815 (if (eq mpointer nil)
17816 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
17817 @end group
17818 @group
17819 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
17820 (set-mouse-color "white"))
17821 @end group
17822 @end smallexample
17823
17824 @item
17825 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
17826 this:
17827
17828 @smallexample
17829 @group
17830 (setq-default
17831 default-frame-alist
17832 '((cursor-color . "white")
17833 (mouse-color . "white")
17834 (foreground-color . "white")
17835 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
17836 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
17837 (cursor-type . box)
17838 @end group
17839 @group
17840 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
17841 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
17842 (width . 80)
17843 (height . 58)
17844 (font .
17845 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
17846 ))
17847 @end group
17848 @end smallexample
17849
17850 @item
17851 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
17852 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
17853 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
17854 problem recently.)
17855
17856 @smallexample
17857 @group
17858 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
17859 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
17860
17861 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
17862 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
17863 @end group
17864 @end smallexample
17865
17866 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
17867
17868 @smallexample
17869 @group
17870 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
17871 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
17872 @end group
17873 @end smallexample
17874
17875 @noindent
17876 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
17877
17878 @need 1250
17879 @item When using `grep'@*
17880 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
17881 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
17882 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
17883 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
17884
17885 @smallexample
17886 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
17887 @end smallexample
17888
17889 @ignore
17890 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
17891
17892 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
17893
17894 smallexample
17895 (load "uncompress")
17896 end smallexample
17897
17898 @end ignore
17899
17900 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
17901 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
17902
17903 @smallexample
17904 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
17905 @end smallexample
17906
17907 @item Set your language environment and default input method
17908
17909 @smallexample
17910 @group
17911 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
17912 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
17913 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
17914 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
17915 @end group
17916 @end smallexample
17917
17918 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
17919
17920 @smallexample
17921 @group
17922 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
17923 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
17924 @end group
17925 @end smallexample
17926 @end itemize
17927
17928 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
17929 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
17930 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
17931
17932 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
17933 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
17934 of the home row.
17935
17936 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
17937 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
17938 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
17939 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
17940 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
17941
17942 @need 1250
17943 @noindent
17944 For a boot script:
17945
17946 @smallexample
17947 @group
17948 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
17949 @exdent or
17950 install-keymap emacs2
17951 @end group
17952 @end smallexample
17953
17954 @need 1250
17955 @noindent
17956 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
17957 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
17958
17959 @smallexample
17960 @group
17961 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
17962 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
17963 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
17964
17965 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
17966 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
17967 @end group
17968 @end smallexample
17969
17970 @need 1250
17971 @noindent
17972 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
17973 key to a @key{META} key:
17974
17975 @smallexample
17976 @group
17977 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
17978 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
17979 @end group
17980 @end smallexample
17981
17982 @need 1700
17983 @node Mode Line
17984 @section A Modified Mode Line
17985 @vindex mode-line-format
17986 @cindex Mode line format
17987
17988 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
17989
17990 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
17991 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
17992
17993 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
17994
17995 @smallexample
17996 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
17997 @end smallexample
17998
17999 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18000 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18001 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18002
18003 @need 1200
18004 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18005
18006 @smallexample
18007 @group
18008 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18009 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18010 (setq-default mode-line-format
18011 (quote
18012 (#("-" 0 1
18013 (help-echo
18014 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18015 mode-line-mule-info
18016 mode-line-modified
18017 mode-line-frame-identification
18018 " "
18019 @end group
18020 @group
18021 mode-line-buffer-identification
18022 " "
18023 (:eval (substring
18024 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18025 ":"
18026 default-directory
18027 #(" " 0 1
18028 (help-echo
18029 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18030 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18031 global-mode-string
18032 @end group
18033 @group
18034 #(" %[(" 0 6
18035 (help-echo
18036 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18037 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18038 mode-line-process
18039 minor-mode-alist
18040 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18041 ")%] "
18042 (-3 . "%P")
18043 ;; "-%-"
18044 )))
18045 @end group
18046 @end smallexample
18047
18048 @noindent
18049 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18050 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18051 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18052 it.
18053
18054 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18055 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18056 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18057 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18058 have not discussed.
18059
18060 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18061 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18062 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18063 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18064 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18065 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18066 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18067 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18068
18069 @need 1000
18070 The new string format has a special syntax:
18071
18072 @smallexample
18073 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18074 @end smallexample
18075
18076 @noindent
18077 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18078 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18079 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18080 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18081 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18082 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18083 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18084 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18085 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18086 string format can be repeated.
18087
18088 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18089 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18090 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18091
18092 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18093 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18094 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18095 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18096
18097 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18098 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18099 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18100 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18101 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18102 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18103 window.)
18104
18105 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18106 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18107 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18108 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18109 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18110 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18111
18112 @need 1250
18113 This is the expression:
18114
18115 @smallexample
18116 @group
18117 (:eval (substring
18118 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18119 @end group
18120 @end smallexample
18121
18122 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18123 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18124 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18125 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18126 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18127 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18128 out the line.
18129
18130 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---your own
18131 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18132 keys than a default Emacs.
18133
18134 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18135 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18136
18137 @smallexample
18138 emacs -q
18139 @end smallexample
18140
18141 @noindent
18142 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18143 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18144 more.
18145
18146 @node Debugging
18147 @chapter Debugging
18148 @cindex debugging
18149
18150 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18151 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18152 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18153
18154 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18155 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18156 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18157
18158 @menu
18159 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18160 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18161 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18162 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18163 * Debugging Exercises::
18164 @end menu
18165
18166 @node debug
18167 @section @code{debug}
18168 @findex debug
18169
18170 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18171 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18172 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18173 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18174 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18175
18176 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18177 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18178
18179 @findex triangle-bugged
18180 @smallexample
18181 @group
18182 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18183 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18184 (let ((total 0))
18185 (while (> number 0)
18186 (setq total (+ total number))
18187 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18188 total))
18189 @end group
18190 @end smallexample
18191
18192 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18193 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18194 echo area.
18195
18196 @need 1250
18197 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18198 argument of 4:
18199
18200 @smallexample
18201 (triangle-bugged 4)
18202 @end smallexample
18203
18204 @noindent
18205 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18206 buffer that says:
18207
18208 @noindent
18209 @smallexample
18210 @group
18211 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18212 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18213 (1= number)
18214 (setq number (1= number))
18215 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18216 (setq number (1= number)))
18217 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18218 (setq number ...)) total)
18219 triangle-bugged(4)
18220 @end group
18221 @group
18222 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18223 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18224 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18225 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18226 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18227 @end group
18228 @end smallexample
18229
18230 @noindent
18231 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18232 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18233 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18234
18235 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18236 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18237 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18238
18239 @ignore
18240 @need 800
18241 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18242
18243 @smallexample
18244 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18245 @end smallexample
18246
18247 @noindent
18248 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18249 version 21.
18250 @end ignore
18251
18252 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18253 You can read the complete backtrace.
18254
18255 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18256 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18257 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18258
18259 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18260 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18261 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18262 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18263 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18264
18265 @need 1250
18266 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18267
18268 @smallexample
18269 (setq number (1= number))
18270 @end smallexample
18271
18272 @noindent
18273 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18274 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18275 top:
18276
18277 @smallexample
18278 (1= number)
18279 @end smallexample
18280
18281 @need 1250
18282 @noindent
18283 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18284
18285 @smallexample
18286 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18287 @end smallexample
18288
18289 @noindent
18290 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18291 then run your test again.
18292
18293 @node debug-on-entry
18294 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18295 @findex debug-on-entry
18296
18297 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18298 function has an error.
18299
18300 @ignore
18301 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18302 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18303 manually.
18304 @end ignore
18305
18306 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18307 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18308 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18309
18310 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18311 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18312
18313 @need 1250
18314 @noindent
18315 Type:
18316
18317 @smallexample
18318 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18319 @end smallexample
18320
18321 @need 1250
18322 @noindent
18323 Now, evaluate the following:
18324
18325 @smallexample
18326 (triangle-bugged 5)
18327 @end smallexample
18328
18329 @noindent
18330 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18331 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18332 function:
18333
18334 @smallexample
18335 @group
18336 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18337 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18338 * triangle-bugged(5)
18339 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18340 @end group
18341 @group
18342 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18343 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18344 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18345 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18346 @end group
18347 @end smallexample
18348
18349 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18350 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18351 like this:
18352
18353 @smallexample
18354 @group
18355 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18356 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18357 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18358 (setq number ...)) total)
18359 * triangle-bugged(5)
18360 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18361 @end group
18362 @group
18363 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18364 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18365 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18366 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18367 @end group
18368 @end smallexample
18369
18370 @noindent
18371 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18372 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18373 definition.
18374
18375 @need 1750
18376 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18377
18378 @smallexample
18379 @group
18380 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18381 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18382 * (setq number (1= number))
18383 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18384 (setq number (1= number)))
18385 @group
18386 @end group
18387 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18388 (setq number ...)) total)
18389 * triangle-bugged(5)
18390 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18391 @group
18392 @end group
18393 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18394 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18395 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18396 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18397 @end group
18398 @end smallexample
18399
18400 @need 1500
18401 @noindent
18402 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18403 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18404 like this:
18405
18406 @smallexample
18407 @group
18408 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18409 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18410 * (1= number)
18411 @dots{}
18412 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18413 @end group
18414 @end smallexample
18415
18416 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18417
18418 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18419 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18420
18421 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18422 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18423 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18424
18425 @smallexample
18426 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18427 @end smallexample
18428
18429 @noindent
18430 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18431
18432 @node debug-on-quit
18433 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18434
18435 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18436 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18437
18438 @findex debug-on-quit
18439 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18440 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18441 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18442
18443 @need 1500
18444 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18445 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18446 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18447
18448 @smallexample
18449 @group
18450 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18451 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18452 (let ((total 0))
18453 (while (> number 0)
18454 (setq total (+ total number))
18455 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18456 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18457 total))
18458 @end group
18459 @end smallexample
18460
18461 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18462 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18463
18464 @node edebug
18465 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18466 @cindex Source level debugger
18467 @findex edebug
18468
18469 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18470 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18471 shows which line you are currently executing.
18472
18473 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18474 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18475
18476 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18477 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18478
18479 @need 1250
18480 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18481 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18482 for a review of it.
18483
18484 @smallexample
18485 @group
18486 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18487 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18488 Uses recursion."
18489 (if (= number 1)
18490 1
18491 (+ number
18492 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18493 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18494 @end group
18495 @end smallexample
18496
18497 @noindent
18498 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18499 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18500 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18501 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18502 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18503 Interaction mode.)
18504
18505 @need 1500
18506 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18507 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18508 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18509 and typing
18510
18511 @smallexample
18512 M-x edebug-defun RET
18513 @end smallexample
18514
18515 @noindent
18516 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18517 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18518
18519 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18520 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18521
18522 @smallexample
18523 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18524 @end smallexample
18525
18526 @noindent
18527 You will be jumped back to the source for
18528 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18529 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18530 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18531 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18532 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18533 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18534
18535 @smallexample
18536 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18537 @end smallexample
18538
18539 @noindent
18540 @iftex
18541 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18542 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18543 @end iftex
18544 @ifnottex
18545 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18546 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18547 @end ifnottex
18548
18549 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18550 be executed; the line will look like this:
18551
18552 @smallexample
18553 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18554 @end smallexample
18555
18556 @noindent
18557 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18558 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18559 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18560 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18561
18562 @smallexample
18563 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18564 @end smallexample
18565
18566 @noindent
18567 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18568 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18569 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18570
18571 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18572 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18573
18574 @smallexample
18575 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18576 @end smallexample
18577
18578 @need 1250
18579 @noindent
18580 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18581 that says:
18582
18583 @smallexample
18584 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18585 @end smallexample
18586
18587 @noindent
18588 This is the bug.
18589
18590 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18591
18592 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18593 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18594 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18595 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18596
18597 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18598 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18599 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18600 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18601 times a function is called, and more.
18602
18603 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18604 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18605
18606 @need 1500
18607 @node Debugging Exercises
18608 @section Debugging Exercises
18609
18610 @itemize @bullet
18611 @item
18612 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18613 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18614 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18615 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18616 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18617 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18618 Manual}.)
18619
18620 @item
18621 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18622 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18623 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18624 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18625 completes without problems.
18626
18627 @item
18628 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18629 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.,
18630 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18631 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18632
18633 @item
18634 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18635 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18636 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18637
18638 @item
18639 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18640 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18641
18642 @item
18643 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18644 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18645 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18646
18647 @item
18648 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18649 stopping point.
18650 @end itemize
18651
18652 @node Conclusion
18653 @chapter Conclusion
18654
18655 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18656 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18657 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18658 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18659
18660 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18661 teach yourself.
18662
18663 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18664 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18665 easy to use that we have not touched.
18666
18667 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18668 and in
18669 @ifnotinfo
18670 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18671 @end ifnotinfo
18672 @ifinfo
18673 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18674 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18675 @end ifinfo
18676
18677 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18678 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18679 figure out or find out what it does.
18680
18681 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18682 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18683 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18684 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18685 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18686 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18687
18688 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18689 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18690 the program that takes you to sources.
18691
18692 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18693 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18694 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18695 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18696 function, for example, looks complicated.
18697
18698 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18699 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18700 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18701 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18702 need to read all the functions. According to
18703 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18704 102 words and symbols.
18705
18706 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18707 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18708 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18709
18710 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18711 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18712 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18713
18714 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18715 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18716 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18717
18718 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18719 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18720 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18721 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18722 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18723
18724 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
18725 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
18726 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
18727 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
18728 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
18729 (@code{find-tag}).
18730
18731 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
18732 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
18733 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
18734
18735 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
18736 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
18737 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
18738
18739 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
18740 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
18741 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
18742 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
18743 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
18744
18745 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
18746 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18747
18748 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
18749 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
18750 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
18751 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
18752 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
18753 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
18754 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
18755 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18756 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
18757
18758 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
18759 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
18760 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
18761 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
18762 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
18763 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
18764 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
18765
18766 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
18767 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
18768 beginning.
18769
18770 @c ================ Appendix ================
18771
18772 @node the-the
18773 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
18774 @findex the-the
18775 @cindex Duplicated words function
18776 @cindex Words, duplicated
18777
18778 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
18779 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
18780 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
18781 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
18782
18783 @need 1250
18784 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
18785 search for duplicates:
18786
18787 @smallexample
18788 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
18789 @end smallexample
18790
18791 @noindent
18792 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
18793 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
18794 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
18795 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
18796 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
18797 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
18798 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
18799 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
18800 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
18801
18802 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
18803 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
18804 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
18805
18806 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
18807 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
18808 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
18809 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
18810
18811 @smallexample
18812 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
18813 @end smallexample
18814
18815 @noindent
18816 Again, not useful.
18817
18818 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
18819 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
18820 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
18821 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
18822
18823 @smallexample
18824 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
18825 @end smallexample
18826
18827 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
18828 expression is good enough, so I use it.
18829
18830 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
18831 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
18832
18833 @smallexample
18834 @group
18835 (defun the-the ()
18836 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
18837 (interactive)
18838 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
18839 (push-mark)
18840 @end group
18841 @group
18842 ;; This regexp is not perfect
18843 ;; but is fairly good over all:
18844 (if (re-search-forward
18845 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
18846 (message "Found duplicated word.")
18847 (message "End of buffer")))
18848 @end group
18849
18850 @group
18851 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
18852 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
18853 @end group
18854 @end smallexample
18855
18856 @sp 1
18857 Here is test text:
18858
18859 @smallexample
18860 @group
18861 one two two three four five
18862 five six seven
18863 @end group
18864 @end smallexample
18865
18866 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
18867 function definition and try each of them on this list.
18868
18869 @node Kill Ring
18870 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
18871 @cindex Kill ring handling
18872 @cindex Handling the kill ring
18873 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
18874
18875 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
18876 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
18877 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
18878
18879 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
18880 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
18881 consider the workings of the kill ring.
18882
18883 @menu
18884 * What the Kill Ring Does::
18885 * current-kill::
18886 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
18887 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
18888 * ring file::
18889 @end menu
18890
18891 @ifnottex
18892 @node What the Kill Ring Does
18893 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
18894 @end ifnottex
18895
18896 @need 1250
18897 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
18898 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
18899 evaluate the following:
18900
18901 @smallexample
18902 @group
18903 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
18904 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
18905 @end group
18906 @end smallexample
18907
18908 @noindent
18909 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
18910 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
18911 it with @kbd{M-w}.
18912
18913 @noindent
18914 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
18915 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
18916 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
18917 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
18918 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
18919 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
18920 end you put point or mark.)
18921
18922 @need 1250
18923 @noindent
18924 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
18925 fill the kill ring:
18926
18927 @smallexample
18928 @group
18929 first some text
18930 second piece of text
18931 third line
18932 fourth line of text
18933 fifth bit of text
18934 @end group
18935 @end smallexample
18936
18937 @need 1250
18938 @noindent
18939 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
18940
18941 @smallexample
18942 kill-ring
18943 @end smallexample
18944
18945 @need 800
18946 @noindent
18947 It is:
18948
18949 @smallexample
18950 @group
18951 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
18952 "third line" "second piece of text")
18953 @end group
18954 @end smallexample
18955
18956 @noindent
18957 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
18958
18959 @need 1250
18960 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
18961
18962 @smallexample
18963 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
18964 @end smallexample
18965
18966 @node current-kill
18967 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
18968 @findex current-kill
18969
18970 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
18971 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
18972 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
18973 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
18974 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
18975 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
18976 and @code{kill-region}.)
18977
18978 @menu
18979 * Code for current-kill::
18980 * Understanding current-kill::
18981 @end menu
18982
18983 @ifnottex
18984 @node Code for current-kill
18985 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
18986 @end ifnottex
18987
18988
18989 @need 1500
18990 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
18991 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
18992
18993 @smallexample
18994 @group
18995 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
18996 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
18997 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
18998 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
18999 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19000 @end group
19001 @group
19002 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19003 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19004 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19005 interprogram-paste-function
19006 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19007 @end group
19008 @group
19009 (if interprogram-paste
19010 (progn
19011 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19012 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19013 ;; selection, with identical text.
19014 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19015 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19016 interprogram-paste)
19017 @end group
19018 @group
19019 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19020 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19021 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19022 (length kill-ring))
19023 kill-ring)))
19024 (or do-not-move
19025 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19026 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19027 @end group
19028 @end smallexample
19029
19030 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19031 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19032 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19033 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19034 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19035
19036 @need 1500
19037 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19038 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19039
19040 @smallexample
19041 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19042 @end smallexample
19043
19044 @ifnottex
19045 @node Understanding current-kill
19046 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19047 @end ifnottex
19048
19049 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19050 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19051 skeletal form:
19052
19053 @smallexample
19054 @group
19055 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19056 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19057 (let @var{varlist}
19058 @var{body}@dots{})
19059 @end group
19060 @end smallexample
19061
19062 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19063 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19064
19065 @menu
19066 * Body of current-kill::
19067 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19068 * Determining the Element::
19069 @end menu
19070
19071 @ifnottex
19072 @node Body of current-kill
19073 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19074 @end ifnottex
19075
19076 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19077 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19078
19079 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19080 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19081 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19082 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19083 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19084 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19085 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19086 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19087
19088 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19089 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19090
19091 @need 2000
19092 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19093 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19094 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19095 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19096
19097 @smallexample
19098 @group
19099 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19100 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19101 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19102 (length kill-ring))
19103 kill-ring)))
19104 (or do-not-move
19105 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19106 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19107 @end group
19108 @end smallexample
19109
19110 @noindent
19111 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19112 signals an error.
19113
19114 @need 1000
19115 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19116 with an @code{if}:
19117
19118 @findex zerop
19119 @findex error
19120 @smallexample
19121 @group
19122 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19123 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19124 ;; No else-part
19125 @end group
19126 @end smallexample
19127
19128 @noindent
19129 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19130 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19131 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19132 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19133
19134 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19135 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19136 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19137 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19138 is similar to the @code{message} function
19139 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19140 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19141 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19142 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19143 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19144
19145 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19146 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19147 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19148
19149 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19150 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19151 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19152 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19153
19154 @ifnottex
19155 @node Digression concerning error
19156 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19157 @end ifnottex
19158
19159 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19160 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19161 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19162 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19163 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19164 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19165 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19166 exploration.
19167
19168 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19169 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19170 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19171 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19172 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19173 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19174 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19175
19176 @ifnottex
19177 @node Determining the Element
19178 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19179 @end ifnottex
19180
19181 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19182 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19183 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19184 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19185
19186 @need 800
19187 The code looks like this:
19188
19189 @smallexample
19190 @group
19191 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19192 (length kill-ring))
19193 kill-ring)))
19194 @end group
19195 @end smallexample
19196
19197 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19198 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19199 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19200 That is what the
19201 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19202 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19203 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19204 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19205 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19206
19207 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19208 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19209 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19210
19211 @need 800
19212 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19213
19214 @smallexample
19215 @group
19216 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19217
19218 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19219 @end group
19220 @end smallexample
19221
19222 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19223 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19224
19225 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19226 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19227
19228 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19229 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19230 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19231 sign as the second argument.
19232
19233 @need 800
19234 Thus,
19235
19236 @smallexample
19237 @group
19238 (mod 12 4)
19239 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19240 (mod 13 4)
19241 @result{} 1
19242 @end group
19243 @end smallexample
19244
19245 @need 1250
19246 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19247 That is fine.
19248
19249 @smallexample
19250 @group
19251 (mod 0 4)
19252 @result{} 0
19253 (mod 1 4)
19254 @result{} 1
19255 @end group
19256 @end smallexample
19257
19258 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19259 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19260 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19261 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19262
19263 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19264 @code{current-kill} function.
19265
19266 @need 1250
19267 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19268 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19269 following:
19270
19271 @smallexample
19272 @group
19273 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19274 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19275 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19276 '("fourth line of text"
19277 "third line"
19278 "second piece of text"
19279 "first some text"))
19280 @end group
19281 @end smallexample
19282
19283 @need 1250
19284 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19285 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19286 element.
19287
19288 @smallexample
19289 @group
19290 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19291 '("fourth line of text"
19292 "third line"
19293 "second piece of text"
19294 "first some text"))
19295 @end group
19296 @end smallexample
19297
19298 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19299 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19300 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19301 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19302 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19303 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19304 Local variables can only be accessed
19305 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19306 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19307
19308 @ignore
19309 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19310 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19311 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
19312 @end ignore
19313
19314 @node yank
19315 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19316 @findex yank
19317
19318 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19319 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19320
19321 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19322 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19323 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19324 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19325
19326 @need 1250
19327 The code looks like this:
19328
19329 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19330 @smallexample
19331 @group
19332 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19333 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19334 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19335 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19336 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19337 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19338 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19339
19340 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19341 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19342 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19343
19344 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19345 @end group
19346 @group
19347 (interactive "*P")
19348 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19349 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19350 ;; for the following command.
19351 (setq this-command t)
19352 (push-mark (point))
19353 @end group
19354 @group
19355 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19356 ((listp arg) 0)
19357 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19358 (t (1- arg)))))
19359 (if (consp arg)
19360 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19361 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19362 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19363 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19364 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19365 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19366 @end group
19367 @group
19368 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19369 (if (eq this-command t)
19370 (setq this-command 'yank))
19371 nil)
19372 @end group
19373 @end smallexample
19374
19375 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19376 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19377 it.
19378
19379 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19380 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19381 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19382 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19383 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19384
19385 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19386 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19387 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19388
19389 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19390 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19391 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19392 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19393 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19394 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19395 function.)
19396
19397 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19398
19399 @node yank-pop
19400 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19401 @findex yank-pop
19402
19403 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19404 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19405 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19406
19407 @c GNU Emacs 22
19408 @smallexample
19409 @group
19410 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19411 "@dots{}"
19412 (interactive "*p")
19413 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19414 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19415 @end group
19416 @group
19417 (setq this-command 'yank)
19418 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19419 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19420 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19421 @end group
19422 @group
19423 (if before
19424 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19425 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19426 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19427 @end group
19428 @group
19429 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19430 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19431 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19432 ;; if possible.
19433 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19434 @end group
19435 @group
19436 (if before
19437 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19438 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19439 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19440 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19441 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19442 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19443 (point)
19444 (current-buffer))))))
19445 nil)
19446 @end group
19447 @end smallexample
19448
19449 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19450 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19451 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19452 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19453 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19454 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19455
19456 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19457 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19458 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19459 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19460 replaced.
19461
19462 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19463 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19464 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19465 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19466
19467 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19468
19469 @node ring file
19470 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19471 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19472
19473 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19474 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19475 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19476 because they were written earlier.
19477
19478 @node Full Graph
19479 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19480
19481 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19482 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19483 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19484 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19485 body itself.
19486
19487 @menu
19488 * Labeled Example::
19489 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19490 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19491 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19492 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19493 @end menu
19494
19495 @ifnottex
19496 @node Labeled Example
19497 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19498 @end ifnottex
19499
19500 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19501 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19502 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19503 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19504
19505 @enumerate
19506 @item
19507 Set up code.
19508
19509 @item
19510 Print Y axis.
19511
19512 @item
19513 Print body of graph.
19514
19515 @item
19516 Print X axis.
19517 @end enumerate
19518
19519 @need 800
19520 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19521
19522 @smallexample
19523 @group
19524 10 -
19525 *
19526 * *
19527 * **
19528 * ***
19529 5 - * *******
19530 * *** *******
19531 *************
19532 ***************
19533 1 - ****************
19534 | | | |
19535 1 5 10 15
19536 @end group
19537 @end smallexample
19538
19539 @noindent
19540 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19541 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19542 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19543
19544 @smallexample
19545 @group
19546 5 - *
19547 * ** *
19548 *******
19549 ********** **
19550 1 - **************
19551 | ^ |
19552 Jan June Jan
19553 @end group
19554 @end smallexample
19555
19556 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19557 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19558 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19559 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19560 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19561
19562 @need 1200
19563 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19564 @code{print-graph} function:
19565
19566 @smallexample
19567 @group
19568 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19569 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19570 (let ((height @dots{}
19571 @dots{}))
19572 @end group
19573 @group
19574 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19575 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19576 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19577 @end group
19578 @end smallexample
19579
19580 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19581 in turn.
19582
19583 @node print-graph Varlist
19584 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19585 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19586
19587 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19588 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19589 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19590 contents of its documentation string.)
19591
19592 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19593 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19594 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19595 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19596 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19597 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19598 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19599
19600 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19601 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19602 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19603 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19604 previous chapter.
19605
19606 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19607 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19608 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19609
19610 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19611 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19612
19613 @smallexample
19614 @group
19615 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19616 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19617 @end group
19618 @end smallexample
19619
19620 @noindent
19621 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19622
19623 @need 2000
19624 @node print-Y-axis
19625 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19626 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19627 @cindex Y axis printing
19628 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19629 @cindex Print vertical axis
19630
19631 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19632 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19633
19634 @smallexample
19635 @group
19636 10 -
19637
19638
19639
19640
19641 5 -
19642
19643
19644
19645 1 -
19646 @end group
19647 @end smallexample
19648
19649 @noindent
19650 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19651 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19652
19653 @menu
19654 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19655 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19656 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19657 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19658 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19659 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19660 @end menu
19661
19662 @ifnottex
19663 @node print-Y-axis in Detail
19664 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19665 @end ifnottex
19666
19667 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19668 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19669 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19670 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19671 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19672 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19673 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19674 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19675 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19676 five.
19677
19678 @ifnottex
19679 @node Height of label
19680 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19681 @end ifnottex
19682
19683 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19684 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19685 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19686 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19687 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19688 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19689
19690 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19691 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19692 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19693 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19694 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19695 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19696 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19697 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19698 is required.
19699
19700 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19701 divided into several smaller problems.
19702
19703 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19704 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19705 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19706
19707 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19708 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19709 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19710 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19711 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19712 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19713 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19714 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19715
19716 @node Compute a Remainder
19717 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19718
19719 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
19720 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
19721 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
19722 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
19723 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
19724 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
19725 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
19726 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
19727 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
19728
19729 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
19730 expressions:
19731
19732 @smallexample
19733 @group
19734 (% 7 5)
19735
19736 (% 10 5)
19737 @end group
19738 @end smallexample
19739
19740 @noindent
19741 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
19742
19743 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
19744 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
19745 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
19746
19747 @smallexample
19748 @group
19749 (zerop (% 7 5))
19750 @result{} nil
19751
19752 (zerop (% 10 5))
19753 @result{} t
19754 @end group
19755 @end smallexample
19756
19757 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
19758 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
19759
19760 @smallexample
19761 (zerop (% height 5))
19762 @end smallexample
19763
19764 @noindent
19765 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
19766 'max numbers-list)}.)
19767
19768 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
19769 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
19770 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
19771 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
19772 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
19773 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
19774 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
19775 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
19776 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
19777 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
19778
19779 @smallexample
19780 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
19781 @end smallexample
19782
19783 @noindent
19784 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
19785
19786 @smallexample
19787 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
19788 @end smallexample
19789
19790 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
19791 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
19792 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
19793 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
19794 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19795
19796 @need 1250
19797 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
19798 following:
19799
19800 @smallexample
19801 @group
19802 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19803 height
19804 ;; @r{else}
19805 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19806 Y-axis-label-spacing))
19807 @end group
19808 @end smallexample
19809
19810 @noindent
19811 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
19812 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
19813 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
19814 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19815
19816 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
19817 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
19818 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
19819 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
19820
19821 @smallexample
19822 @group
19823 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
19824 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
19825 @end group
19826
19827 @group
19828 @dots{}
19829 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
19830 (height-of-top-line
19831 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19832 height
19833 @end group
19834 @group
19835 ;; @r{else}
19836 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19837 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
19838 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
19839 @dots{}
19840 @end group
19841 @end smallexample
19842
19843 @noindent
19844 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
19845 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
19846 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
19847 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
19848 more about @code{let*}.)
19849
19850 @node Y Axis Element
19851 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
19852
19853 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
19854 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
19855 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
19856 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
19857 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
19858 include a leading blank space before the number.
19859
19860 @findex number-to-string
19861 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
19862 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
19863 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
19864 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
19865 For example,
19866
19867 @smallexample
19868 @group
19869 (length (number-to-string 35))
19870 @result{} 2
19871
19872 (length (number-to-string 100))
19873 @result{} 3
19874 @end group
19875 @end smallexample
19876
19877 @noindent
19878 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
19879 see this alternative name in various sources.)
19880
19881 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
19882 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
19883 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
19884
19885 @vindex Y-axis-tic
19886 @smallexample
19887 @group
19888 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
19889 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
19890 @end group
19891 @end smallexample
19892
19893 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
19894 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
19895
19896 @smallexample
19897 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
19898 @end smallexample
19899
19900 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
19901 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
19902 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
19903
19904 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
19905 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
19906 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
19907 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
19908 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
19909 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
19910 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
19911
19912 @smallexample
19913 @group
19914 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
19915 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
19916 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
19917 and is padded as needed so all line up with
19918 the element for the largest number."
19919 @end group
19920 @group
19921 (let* ((leading-spaces
19922 (- full-Y-label-width
19923 (length
19924 (concat (number-to-string number)
19925 Y-axis-tic)))))
19926 @end group
19927 @group
19928 (concat
19929 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
19930 (number-to-string number)
19931 Y-axis-tic)))
19932 @end group
19933 @end smallexample
19934
19935 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
19936 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
19937
19938 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
19939 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
19940 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
19941
19942 @findex make-string
19943 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
19944 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
19945 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
19946 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
19947 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
19948 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
19949 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
19950 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
19951
19952 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
19953 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
19954 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
19955
19956 @node Y-axis-column
19957 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
19958
19959 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
19960 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
19961 as the label for the vertical axis:
19962
19963 @findex Y-axis-column
19964 @smallexample
19965 @group
19966 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
19967 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
19968 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
19969 (let (Y-axis)
19970 @group
19971 @end group
19972 (while (> height 1)
19973 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19974 ;; @r{Insert label.}
19975 (setq Y-axis
19976 (cons
19977 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
19978 Y-axis))
19979 @group
19980 @end group
19981 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
19982 (setq Y-axis
19983 (cons
19984 (make-string width-of-label ? )
19985 Y-axis)))
19986 (setq height (1- height)))
19987 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
19988 (setq Y-axis
19989 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
19990 (nreverse Y-axis)))
19991 @end group
19992 @end smallexample
19993
19994 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
19995 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
19996 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
19997 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
19998 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
19999 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20000 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20001
20002 @need 2000
20003 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate
20004 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20005
20006 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20007 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20008
20009 @findex print-Y-axis
20010 @smallexample
20011 @group
20012 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20013 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20014 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20015 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20016 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20017 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20018 @end group
20019 @group
20020 (let ((start (point)))
20021 (insert-rectangle
20022 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20023 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20024 (goto-char start)
20025 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20026 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20027 @end group
20028 @end smallexample
20029
20030 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20031 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20032 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20033 the graph.
20034
20035 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20036
20037 @enumerate
20038 @item
20039 Install
20040
20041 @smallexample
20042 @group
20043 Y-axis-label-spacing
20044 Y-axis-tic
20045 Y-axis-element
20046 Y-axis-column
20047 print-Y-axis
20048 @end group
20049 @end smallexample
20050
20051 @item
20052 Copy the following expression:
20053
20054 @smallexample
20055 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20056 @end smallexample
20057
20058 @item
20059 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20060 want the axis labels to start.
20061
20062 @item
20063 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20064
20065 @item
20066 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20067 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20068
20069 @item
20070 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20071 @end enumerate
20072
20073 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20074 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20075 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20076 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20077
20078 @need 2000
20079 @node print-X-axis
20080 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20081 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20082 @cindex X axis printing
20083 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20084 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20085
20086 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20087 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20088
20089 @smallexample
20090 @group
20091 | | | |
20092 1 5 10 15
20093 @end group
20094 @end smallexample
20095
20096 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20097 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20098 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20099 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20100
20101 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20102 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20103 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20104
20105 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20106 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20107 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20108 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20109
20110 @menu
20111 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20112 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20113 @end menu
20114
20115 @ifnottex
20116 @node Similarities differences
20117 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20118 @end ifnottex
20119
20120 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20121 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20122 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20123 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20124 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20125
20126 This is a three step process:
20127
20128 @enumerate
20129 @item
20130 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20131
20132 @item
20133 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20134
20135 @item
20136 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20137 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20138 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20139 @end enumerate
20140
20141 @node X Axis Tic Marks
20142 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20143
20144 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20145 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20146
20147 @smallexample
20148 @group
20149 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20150 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20151 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20152 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20153 @end group
20154 @end smallexample
20155
20156 @noindent
20157 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20158 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20159 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20160 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20161 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20162 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20163 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20164
20165 @need 1200
20166 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20167
20168 @smallexample
20169 @group
20170 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20171 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20172 @end group
20173 @end smallexample
20174
20175 @need 1250
20176 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20177
20178 @smallexample
20179 | | | |
20180 @end smallexample
20181
20182 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20183 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20184
20185 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20186 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20187 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20188
20189 @need 1250
20190 The code looks like this:
20191
20192 @smallexample
20193 @group
20194 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20195 @dots{}
20196 (concat
20197 (make-string
20198 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20199 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20200 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20201 ? )
20202 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20203 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20204 @dots{}
20205 @end group
20206 @end smallexample
20207
20208 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20209 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20210 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20211
20212 @need 1250
20213 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20214 looks like this:
20215
20216 @smallexample
20217 @group
20218 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20219 @dots{}
20220 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20221 @dots{}
20222 @end group
20223 @end smallexample
20224
20225 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20226 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20227 axis:
20228
20229 @smallexample
20230 @group
20231 ;; X-length
20232 @dots{}
20233 (length numbers-list)
20234 @end group
20235
20236 @group
20237 ;; tic-width
20238 @dots{}
20239 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20240 @end group
20241
20242 @group
20243 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20244 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20245 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20246 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20247 @end group
20248 @end smallexample
20249
20250 @need 1250
20251 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20252
20253 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20254 @smallexample
20255 @group
20256 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20257 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20258 "Print ticks for X axis."
20259 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20260 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20261 @end group
20262 @group
20263 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20264 (insert (concat
20265 (make-string
20266 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20267 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20268 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20269 ? )
20270 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20271 @end group
20272 @group
20273 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20274 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20275 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20276 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20277 @end group
20278 @end smallexample
20279
20280 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20281
20282 @need 1250
20283 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20284
20285 @findex X-axis-element
20286 @smallexample
20287 @group
20288 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20289 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20290 (let ((leading-spaces
20291 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20292 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20293 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20294 (number-to-string number))))
20295 @end group
20296 @end smallexample
20297
20298 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20299 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20300
20301 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20302 @smallexample
20303 @group
20304 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20305 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20306 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20307 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20308 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20309 (insert "1")
20310 @end group
20311 @group
20312 (insert (concat
20313 (make-string
20314 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20315 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20316 ? )
20317 (number-to-string number)))
20318 @end group
20319 @group
20320 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20321 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20322 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20323 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20324 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20325 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20326 @end group
20327 @end smallexample
20328
20329 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20330 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20331 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20332
20333 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20334 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20335 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20336 separates the two lines.
20337
20338 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20339 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20340
20341 @findex print-X-axis
20342 @smallexample
20343 @group
20344 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20345 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20346 (let* ((leading-spaces
20347 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20348 @end group
20349 @group
20350 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20351 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20352 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20353 @end group
20354 @group
20355 (X-tic
20356 (concat
20357 (make-string
20358 @end group
20359 @group
20360 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20361 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20362 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20363 ? )
20364 @end group
20365 @group
20366 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20367 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20368 @end group
20369 @group
20370 (tic-number
20371 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20372 (/ X-length tic-width)
20373 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20374 @end group
20375 @group
20376 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20377 (insert "\n")
20378 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20379 @end group
20380 @end smallexample
20381
20382 @need 1250
20383 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20384
20385 @enumerate
20386 @item
20387 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20388 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20389 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20390
20391 @item
20392 Copy the following expression:
20393
20394 @smallexample
20395 @group
20396 (progn
20397 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20398 (symbol-width 1))
20399 (print-X-axis
20400 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20401 @end group
20402 @end smallexample
20403
20404 @item
20405 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20406 want the axis labels to start.
20407
20408 @item
20409 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20410
20411 @item
20412 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20413 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20414
20415 @item
20416 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20417 @end enumerate
20418
20419 @need 1250
20420 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20421 @sp 1
20422
20423 @smallexample
20424 @group
20425 | | | | |
20426 1 5 10 15 20
20427 @end group
20428 @end smallexample
20429
20430 @node Print Whole Graph
20431 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20432 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20433 @cindex Whole graph printing
20434 @cindex Graph, printing all
20435
20436 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20437
20438 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20439 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20440 Axes}), but with additions.
20441
20442 @need 1250
20443 Here is the outline:
20444
20445 @smallexample
20446 @group
20447 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20448 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20449 (let ((height @dots{}
20450 @dots{}))
20451 @end group
20452 @group
20453 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20454 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20455 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20456 @end group
20457 @end smallexample
20458
20459 @menu
20460 * The final version:: A few changes.
20461 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20462 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20463 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20464 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20465 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20466 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20467 @end menu
20468
20469 @ifnottex
20470 @node The final version
20471 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20472 @end ifnottex
20473
20474 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20475 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20476 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20477 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20478 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20479
20480 @need 1500
20481 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20482 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20483 this:
20484
20485 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20486 @smallexample
20487 @group
20488 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20489 (defun Y-axis-column
20490 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20491 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20492 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20493 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20494 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20495 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20496 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20497 that each line is five units of the graph."
20498 @end group
20499 @group
20500 (let (Y-axis
20501 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20502 (while (> height 1)
20503 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20504 @end group
20505 @group
20506 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20507 (setq Y-axis
20508 (cons
20509 (Y-axis-element
20510 (* height number-per-line)
20511 width-of-label)
20512 Y-axis))
20513 @end group
20514 @group
20515 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20516 (setq Y-axis
20517 (cons
20518 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20519 Y-axis)))
20520 (setq height (1- height)))
20521 @end group
20522 @group
20523 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20524 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20525 (or vertical-step 1)
20526 width-of-label)
20527 Y-axis))
20528 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20529 @end group
20530 @end smallexample
20531
20532 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20533 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20534 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20535
20536 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20537 @smallexample
20538 @group
20539 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20540 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20541 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20542 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20543 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20544 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20545 @end group
20546 @group
20547 (let (from-position)
20548 (while numbers-list
20549 (setq from-position (point))
20550 (insert-rectangle
20551 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20552 (goto-char from-position)
20553 (forward-char symbol-width)
20554 @end group
20555 @group
20556 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20557 (sit-for 0)
20558 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20559 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20560 (forward-line height)
20561 (insert "\n")))
20562 @end group
20563 @end smallexample
20564
20565 @need 1250
20566 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20567
20568 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20569 @smallexample
20570 @group
20571 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20572 (defun print-graph
20573 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20574 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20575 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20576 @end group
20577
20578 @group
20579 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20580 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20581 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20582 each row is five units."
20583 @end group
20584 @group
20585 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20586 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20587 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20588 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20589 @end group
20590 @group
20591 (height-of-top-line
20592 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20593 height
20594 ;; @r{else}
20595 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20596 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20597 @end group
20598 @group
20599 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20600 (full-Y-label-width
20601 (length
20602 @end group
20603 @group
20604 (concat
20605 (number-to-string
20606 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20607 Y-axis-tic))))
20608 @end group
20609
20610 @group
20611 (print-Y-axis
20612 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20613 @end group
20614 @group
20615 (graph-body-print
20616 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20617 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20618 @end group
20619 @end smallexample
20620
20621 @node Test print-graph
20622 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20623
20624 @need 1250
20625 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20626
20627 @enumerate
20628 @item
20629 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20630 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20631 rest of the code.)
20632
20633 @item
20634 Copy the following expression:
20635
20636 @smallexample
20637 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20638 @end smallexample
20639
20640 @item
20641 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20642 want the axis labels to start.
20643
20644 @item
20645 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20646
20647 @item
20648 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20649 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20650
20651 @item
20652 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20653 @end enumerate
20654
20655 @need 1250
20656 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20657
20658 @smallexample
20659 @group
20660 10 -
20661
20662
20663 *
20664 ** *
20665 5 - **** *
20666 **** ***
20667 * *********
20668 ************
20669 1 - *************
20670
20671 | | | |
20672 1 5 10 15
20673 @end group
20674 @end smallexample
20675
20676 @need 1200
20677 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20678 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20679
20680 @smallexample
20681 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20682 @end smallexample
20683
20684 @need 1250
20685 @noindent
20686 The graph looks like this:
20687
20688 @smallexample
20689 @group
20690 20 -
20691
20692
20693 *
20694 ** *
20695 10 - **** *
20696 **** ***
20697 * *********
20698 ************
20699 2 - *************
20700
20701 | | | |
20702 1 5 10 15
20703 @end group
20704 @end smallexample
20705
20706 @noindent
20707 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20708 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
20709 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
20710
20711 @node Graphing words in defuns
20712 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20713
20714 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20715 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20716 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20717 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20718
20719 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
20720 requisite code.
20721
20722 @need 1500
20723 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
20724 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
20725 following:
20726
20727 @smallexample
20728 @group
20729 (setq top-of-ranges
20730 '(10 20 30 40 50
20731 60 70 80 90 100
20732 110 120 130 140 150
20733 160 170 180 190 200
20734 210 220 230 240 250
20735 260 270 280 290 300)
20736 @end group
20737 @end smallexample
20738
20739 @noindent
20740 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
20741
20742 @need 1500
20743 @noindent
20744 Evaluate the following:
20745
20746 @smallexample
20747 @group
20748 (setq list-for-graph
20749 (defuns-per-range
20750 (sort
20751 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
20752 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
20753 t ".+el$"))
20754 '<)
20755 top-of-ranges))
20756 @end group
20757 @end smallexample
20758
20759 @noindent
20760 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
20761 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
20762 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
20763
20764 @smallexample
20765 @group
20766 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
20767 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
20768 @end group
20769 @end smallexample
20770
20771 @noindent
20772 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
20773 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
20774 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
20775 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
20776
20777 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
20778 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
20779
20780 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
20781 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
20782 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
20783 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
20784
20785 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
20786 one-fiftieth its present value.
20787
20788 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
20789 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
20790
20791 @smallexample
20792 @group
20793 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
20794 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
20795 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
20796 @end group
20797 @end smallexample
20798
20799 @node lambda
20800 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
20801 @cindex Anonymous function
20802 @findex lambda
20803
20804 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
20805 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
20806 include its whole body.
20807
20808 @need 1250
20809 @noindent
20810 Thus,
20811
20812 @smallexample
20813 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20814 @end smallexample
20815
20816 @noindent
20817 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
20818 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
20819
20820 @need 1200
20821 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
20822 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
20823 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
20824 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
20825
20826 @smallexample
20827 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
20828 @end smallexample
20829
20830 @noindent
20831 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
20832
20833 @need 1250
20834 @noindent
20835 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
20836
20837 @c clear print-postscript-figures
20838 @c lambda example diagram #1
20839 @ifnottex
20840 @smallexample
20841 @group
20842 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20843 \_______________/ ^
20844 | |
20845 function argument
20846 @end group
20847 @end smallexample
20848 @end ifnottex
20849 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20850 @sp 1
20851 @tex
20852 @center @image{lambda-1}
20853 @end tex
20854 @sp 1
20855 @end ifset
20856 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20857 @iftex
20858 @smallexample
20859 @group
20860 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20861 \_______________/ ^
20862 | |
20863 function argument
20864 @end group
20865 @end smallexample
20866 @end iftex
20867 @end ifclear
20868
20869 @noindent
20870 This expression returns 21.
20871
20872 @need 1250
20873 @noindent
20874 Similarly, we can write:
20875
20876 @c lambda example diagram #2
20877 @ifnottex
20878 @smallexample
20879 @group
20880 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20881 \____________________________/ ^
20882 | |
20883 anonymous function argument
20884 @end group
20885 @end smallexample
20886 @end ifnottex
20887 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20888 @sp 1
20889 @tex
20890 @center @image{lambda-2}
20891 @end tex
20892 @sp 1
20893 @end ifset
20894 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20895 @iftex
20896 @smallexample
20897 @group
20898 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20899 \____________________________/ ^
20900 | |
20901 anonymous function argument
20902 @end group
20903 @end smallexample
20904 @end iftex
20905 @end ifclear
20906
20907 @need 1250
20908 @noindent
20909 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
20910
20911 @c lambda example diagram #3
20912 @ifnottex
20913 @smallexample
20914 @group
20915 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20916 \______________________/ \_/
20917 | |
20918 anonymous function argument
20919 @end group
20920 @end smallexample
20921 @end ifnottex
20922 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20923 @sp 1
20924 @tex
20925 @center @image{lambda-3}
20926 @end tex
20927 @sp 1
20928 @end ifset
20929 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20930 @iftex
20931 @smallexample
20932 @group
20933 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20934 \______________________/ \_/
20935 | |
20936 anonymous function argument
20937 @end group
20938 @end smallexample
20939 @end iftex
20940 @end ifclear
20941
20942 @noindent
20943 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
20944 divides that number by 50.
20945
20946 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
20947 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
20948 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
20949
20950 @node mapcar
20951 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
20952 @findex mapcar
20953
20954 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
20955 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
20956 a sequence.
20957
20958 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
20959 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
20960 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
20961 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
20962 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
20963 first of a list.
20964
20965 @need 1250
20966 @noindent
20967 For example,
20968
20969 @smallexample
20970 @group
20971 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
20972 @result{} (3 5 7)
20973 @end group
20974 @end smallexample
20975
20976 @noindent
20977 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
20978 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
20979
20980 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
20981 all the remaining.
20982 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
20983 @code{apply}.)
20984
20985 @need 1250
20986 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
20987 anonymous function:
20988
20989 @smallexample
20990 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20991 @end smallexample
20992
20993 @noindent
20994 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
20995 @code{list-for-graph}.
20996
20997 @need 1250
20998 The whole expression looks like this:
20999
21000 @smallexample
21001 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21002 @end smallexample
21003
21004 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21005 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21006
21007 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21008 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21009 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21010
21011 @smallexample
21012 @group
21013 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21014 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21015 @end group
21016 @end smallexample
21017
21018 @need 1250
21019 The resulting list looks like this:
21020
21021 @smallexample
21022 @group
21023 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21024 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21025 @end group
21026 @end smallexample
21027
21028 @noindent
21029 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21030 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21031 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21032 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21033
21034 @node Another Bug
21035 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21036 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21037 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21038
21039 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21040 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21041 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21042 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21043 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21044
21045 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21046 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21047 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21048 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21049 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21050 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21051 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21052 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21053
21054 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21055 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21056 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21057 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21058 a little thought.
21059
21060 @need 1250
21061 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21062
21063 @smallexample
21064 @group
21065 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21066 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21067 &optional horizontal-step)
21068 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21069 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21070 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21071 @end group
21072 @group
21073 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21074 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21075 (delete-char
21076 (- (1-
21077 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21078 (insert (concat
21079 (make-string
21080 @end group
21081 @group
21082 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21083 (- (* symbol-width
21084 X-axis-label-spacing)
21085 (1-
21086 (length
21087 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21088 2)
21089 ? )
21090 (number-to-string
21091 (* number horizontal-step))))
21092 @end group
21093 @group
21094 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21095 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21096 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21097 (insert (X-axis-element
21098 (* number horizontal-step)))
21099 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21100 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21101 @end group
21102 @end smallexample
21103
21104 @need 1500
21105 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21106 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21107 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21108 (the full text is too much to print).
21109
21110 @iftex
21111 @smallexample
21112 @group
21113 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21114 @dots{}
21115 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21116 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21117 @end group
21118 @end smallexample
21119
21120 @smallexample
21121 @group
21122 (defun print-graph
21123 (numbers-list
21124 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21125 @dots{}
21126 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21127 @end group
21128 @end smallexample
21129 @end iftex
21130
21131 @ifnottex
21132 @smallexample
21133 @group
21134 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21135 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21136 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21137 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21138 each column."
21139 @end group
21140 @group
21141 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21142 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21143 (let* ((leading-spaces
21144 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21145 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21146 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21147 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21148 @end group
21149 @group
21150 (X-tic
21151 (concat
21152 (make-string
21153 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21154 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21155 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21156 ? )
21157 @end group
21158 @group
21159 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21160 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21161 (tic-number
21162 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21163 (/ X-length tic-width)
21164 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21165 @end group
21166
21167 @group
21168 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21169 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21170 (insert "\n")
21171 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21172 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21173 @end group
21174 @end smallexample
21175
21176 @smallexample
21177 @group
21178 (defun print-graph
21179 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21180 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21181 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21182 @end group
21183
21184 @group
21185 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21186 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21187 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21188 each row is five units.
21189 @end group
21190
21191 @group
21192 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21193 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21194 each column."
21195 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21196 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21197 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21198 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21199 @end group
21200 @group
21201 (height-of-top-line
21202 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21203 height
21204 ;; @r{else}
21205 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21206 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21207 @end group
21208 @group
21209 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21210 (full-Y-label-width
21211 (length
21212 (concat
21213 (number-to-string
21214 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21215 Y-axis-tic))))
21216 @end group
21217 @group
21218 (print-Y-axis
21219 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21220 (graph-body-print
21221 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21222 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21223 @end group
21224 @end smallexample
21225 @end ifnottex
21226
21227 @c qqq
21228 @ignore
21229 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21230
21231 @need 1250
21232 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21233
21234 @smallexample
21235 @group
21236 (defvar top-of-ranges
21237 '(10 20 30 40 50
21238 60 70 80 90 100
21239 110 120 130 140 150
21240 160 170 180 190 200
21241 210 220 230 240 250)
21242 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21243 @end group
21244
21245 @group
21246 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21247 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21248 @end group
21249
21250 @group
21251 (defvar graph-blank " "
21252 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21253 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21254 as graph-symbol.")
21255 @end group
21256
21257 @group
21258 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21259 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21260 @end group
21261
21262 @group
21263 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21264 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21265 @end group
21266
21267 @group
21268 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21269 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21270 @end group
21271
21272 @group
21273 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21274 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21275 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21276 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21277 @end group
21278 @end smallexample
21279
21280 @smallexample
21281 @group
21282 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21283 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21284 (beginning-of-defun)
21285 (let ((count 0)
21286 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21287 @end group
21288
21289 @group
21290 (while
21291 (and (< (point) end)
21292 (re-search-forward
21293 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21294 end t))
21295 (setq count (1+ count)))
21296 count))
21297 @end group
21298 @end smallexample
21299
21300 @smallexample
21301 @group
21302 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21303 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21304 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21305 Each number is the number of words or
21306 symbols in one function definition."
21307 @end group
21308
21309 @group
21310 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21311 (save-excursion
21312 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21313 (lengths-list))
21314 (set-buffer buffer)
21315 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21316 (widen)
21317 (goto-char (point-min))
21318 @end group
21319
21320 @group
21321 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21322 (setq lengths-list
21323 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21324 (kill-buffer buffer)
21325 lengths-list)))
21326 @end group
21327 @end smallexample
21328
21329 @smallexample
21330 @group
21331 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21332 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21333 (let (lengths-list)
21334 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21335 (while list-of-files
21336 (setq lengths-list
21337 (append
21338 lengths-list
21339 @end group
21340 @group
21341 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21342 (lengths-list-file
21343 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21344 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21345 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21346 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21347 lengths-list))
21348 @end group
21349 @end smallexample
21350
21351 @smallexample
21352 @group
21353 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21354 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21355 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21356 (number-within-range 0)
21357 defuns-per-range-list)
21358 @end group
21359
21360 @group
21361 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21362 (while top-of-ranges
21363
21364 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21365 (while (and
21366 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21367 (car sorted-lengths)
21368 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21369
21370 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21371 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21372 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21373 @end group
21374
21375 @group
21376 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21377
21378 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21379 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21380 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21381
21382 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21383 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21384 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21385 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21386 @end group
21387
21388 @group
21389 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21390 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21391 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21392 (cons
21393 (length sorted-lengths)
21394 defuns-per-range-list))
21395
21396 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21397 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21398 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21399 @end group
21400 @end smallexample
21401
21402 @smallexample
21403 @group
21404 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21405 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21406 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21407 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21408 of the list.
21409 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21410 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21411 @end group
21412
21413 @group
21414 (let ((insert-list nil)
21415 (number-of-top-blanks
21416 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21417
21418 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21419 (while (> actual-height 0)
21420 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21421 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21422 @end group
21423
21424 @group
21425 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21426 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21427 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21428 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21429 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21430
21431 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21432 insert-list))
21433 @end group
21434 @end smallexample
21435
21436 @smallexample
21437 @group
21438 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21439 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21440 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21441 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21442 the element for the largest number."
21443 @end group
21444 @group
21445 (let* ((leading-spaces
21446 (- full-Y-label-width
21447 (length
21448 (concat (number-to-string number)
21449 Y-axis-tic)))))
21450 @end group
21451 @group
21452 (concat
21453 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21454 (number-to-string number)
21455 Y-axis-tic)))
21456 @end group
21457 @end smallexample
21458
21459 @smallexample
21460 @group
21461 (defun print-Y-axis
21462 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21463 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21464 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21465 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21466 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21467 @end group
21468 @group
21469 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21470 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21471 (let ((start (point)))
21472 (insert-rectangle
21473 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21474 @end group
21475 @group
21476 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21477 (goto-char start)
21478 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21479 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21480 @end group
21481 @end smallexample
21482
21483 @smallexample
21484 @group
21485 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21486 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21487 "Print ticks for X axis."
21488 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21489 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21490 @end group
21491 @group
21492 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21493 (insert (concat
21494 (make-string
21495 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21496 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21497 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21498 ? )
21499 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21500 @end group
21501 @group
21502 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21503 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21504 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21505 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21506 @end group
21507 @end smallexample
21508
21509 @smallexample
21510 @group
21511 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21512 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21513 (let ((leading-spaces
21514 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21515 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21516 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21517 (number-to-string number))))
21518 @end group
21519 @end smallexample
21520
21521 @smallexample
21522 @group
21523 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21524 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21525 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21526 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21527 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21528 @end group
21529 @group
21530 (let (from-position)
21531 (while numbers-list
21532 (setq from-position (point))
21533 (insert-rectangle
21534 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21535 (goto-char from-position)
21536 (forward-char symbol-width)
21537 @end group
21538 @group
21539 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21540 (sit-for 0)
21541 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21542 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21543 (forward-line height)
21544 (insert "\n")))
21545 @end group
21546 @end smallexample
21547
21548 @smallexample
21549 @group
21550 (defun Y-axis-column
21551 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21552 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21553 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21554 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21555 @end group
21556 @group
21557 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21558 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21559 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21560 that each line is five units of the graph."
21561 (let (Y-axis
21562 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21563 @end group
21564 @group
21565 (while (> height 1)
21566 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21567 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21568 (setq Y-axis
21569 (cons
21570 (Y-axis-element
21571 (* height number-per-line)
21572 width-of-label)
21573 Y-axis))
21574 @end group
21575 @group
21576 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21577 (setq Y-axis
21578 (cons
21579 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21580 Y-axis)))
21581 (setq height (1- height)))
21582 @end group
21583 @group
21584 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21585 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21586 (or vertical-step 1)
21587 width-of-label)
21588 Y-axis))
21589 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21590 @end group
21591 @end smallexample
21592
21593 @smallexample
21594 @group
21595 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21596 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21597 &optional horizontal-step)
21598 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21599 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21600 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21601 @end group
21602 @group
21603 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21604 ;; line up number
21605 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21606 (insert (concat
21607 (make-string
21608 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21609 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21610 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21611 2)
21612 ? )
21613 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21614 @end group
21615 @group
21616 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21617 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21618 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21619 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21620 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21621 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21622 @end group
21623 @end smallexample
21624
21625 @smallexample
21626 @group
21627 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21628 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21629 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21630 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21631 each column."
21632 @end group
21633 @group
21634 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21635 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21636 (let* ((leading-spaces
21637 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21638 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21639 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21640 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21641 @end group
21642 @group
21643 (X-tic
21644 (concat
21645 (make-string
21646 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21647 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21648 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21649 ? )
21650 @end group
21651 @group
21652 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21653 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21654 (tic-number
21655 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21656 (/ X-length tic-width)
21657 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21658 @end group
21659
21660 @group
21661 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21662 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21663 (insert "\n")
21664 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21665 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21666 @end group
21667 @end smallexample
21668
21669 @smallexample
21670 @group
21671 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21672 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21673 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21674 @end group
21675 @end smallexample
21676
21677 @smallexample
21678 @group
21679 (defun print-graph
21680 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21681 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21682 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21683 @end group
21684
21685 @group
21686 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21687 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21688 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21689 each row is five units.
21690 @end group
21691
21692 @group
21693 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21694 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21695 each column."
21696 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21697 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21698 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21699 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21700 @end group
21701 @group
21702 (height-of-top-line
21703 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21704 height
21705 ;; @r{else}
21706 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21707 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21708 @end group
21709 @group
21710 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21711 (full-Y-label-width
21712 (length
21713 (concat
21714 (number-to-string
21715 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21716 Y-axis-tic))))
21717 @end group
21718 @group
21719
21720 (print-Y-axis
21721 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21722 (graph-body-print
21723 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21724 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21725 @end group
21726 @end smallexample
21727 @c qqq
21728 @end ignore
21729
21730 @page
21731 @node Final printed graph
21732 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
21733
21734 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
21735 like this:
21736 @sp 1
21737
21738 @smallexample
21739 @group
21740 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
21741 @end group
21742 @end smallexample
21743 @sp 1
21744
21745 @noindent
21746 Here is the graph:
21747 @sp 2
21748
21749 @smallexample
21750 @group
21751 1000 - *
21752 **
21753 **
21754 **
21755 **
21756 750 - ***
21757 ***
21758 ***
21759 ***
21760 ****
21761 500 - *****
21762 ******
21763 ******
21764 ******
21765 *******
21766 250 - ********
21767 ********* *
21768 *********** *
21769 ************* *
21770 50 - ***************** * *
21771 | | | | | | | |
21772 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
21773 @end group
21774 @end smallexample
21775
21776 @sp 2
21777
21778 @noindent
21779 The largest group of functions contain 10--19 words and symbols each.
21780
21781 @node Free Software and Free Manuals
21782 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
21783
21784 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
21785 @sp 1
21786
21787 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
21788 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
21789 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
21790 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
21791 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
21792 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
21793
21794 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
21795 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
21796 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
21797 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
21798
21799 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
21800 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
21801 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
21802 them from the free software community.
21803
21804 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
21805 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
21806 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
21807 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
21808 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
21809 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
21810 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
21811 so that we cannot use it.
21812
21813 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
21814 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
21815
21816 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
21817 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
21818 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
21819 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
21820 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
21821 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
21822 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
21823 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
21824 problems.
21825
21826 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
21827 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
21828 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
21829 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
21830 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
21831
21832 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
21833 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
21834 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
21835 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
21836 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
21837 views.
21838
21839 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
21840 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
21841 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
21842 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
21843 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
21844 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
21845 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
21846 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
21847
21848 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
21849 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
21850 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
21851 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
21852 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
21853 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
21854 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
21855 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
21856
21857 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
21858 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
21859 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
21860 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
21861
21862 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
21863 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
21864 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
21865 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
21866
21867 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
21868 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
21869 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
21870 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
21871 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
21872
21873 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
21874 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
21875 change that.
21876
21877 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
21878 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
21879 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
21880 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
21881 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
21882 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
21883
21884 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
21885 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
21886 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
21887 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
21888 he must above all make it free.
21889
21890 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
21891 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
21892 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
21893 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
21894
21895 @sp 2
21896 @noindent
21897 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
21898 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
21899 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
21900
21901 @node GNU Free Documentation License
21902 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
21903
21904 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
21905 @include doclicense.texi
21906
21907 @node Index
21908 @unnumbered Index
21909
21910 @ignore
21911 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
21912 @end ignore
21913
21914 @printindex cp
21915
21916 @iftex
21917 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
21918
21919 @tex
21920 \par\vfill\supereject
21921 \ifodd\pageno
21922 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21923 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21924 %\page\hbox{}\page
21925 \else
21926 % \par\vfill\supereject
21927 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21928 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21929 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21930 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21931 \fi
21932 @end tex
21933
21934 @c page
21935 @w{ }
21936
21937 @c ================ Biographical information ================
21938
21939 @w{ }
21940 @sp 8
21941 @center About the Author
21942 @sp 1
21943 @end iftex
21944
21945 @ifnottex
21946 @node About the Author
21947 @unnumbered About the Author
21948 @end ifnottex
21949
21950 @quotation
21951 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
21952 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
21953 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
21954 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
21955 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
21956 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
21957 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
21958 airplane.
21959 @end quotation
21960
21961 @c @page
21962 @c @w{ }
21963 @c
21964 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
21965 @c @tex
21966 @c \par\vfill\supereject
21967 @c @end tex
21968
21969 @c @iftex
21970 @c @headings off
21971 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
21972 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
21973 @c @end iftex
21974
21975 @bye